6 Series
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or
Integrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of the
printed quick reference for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
© 2013 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/13, 13 07 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 226.
6 Notes
At a glance
12 Cockpit
16 iDrive
22 Voice activation system
25 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Controls
30 Opening and closing
45 Adjusting
54 Transporting children safely
58 Driving
71 Displays
86 Lamps
91 Safety
116 Driving stability control systems
124 Driving comfort
151 Climate control
157 Interior equipment
162 Storage compartments
Driving tips
168 Things to remember when driving
171 Loading
173 Saving fuel
Mobility
182 Refueling
184 Fuel
185 Wheels and tires
197 Engine compartment
199 Engine oil
201 Coolant
202 Maintenance
204 Replacing components
210 Breakdown assistance
215 Care
Reference
222 Technical data
226 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐
pendix of the printed quick reference for the
vehicle.
User's manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication and the short commands of the
voice activation system are described in a sep‐
arate user's manual, which is also included
with the onboard literature.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any questions, your service
center will be glad to advise you at any time.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com.
Symbols in the Owner's
Manual
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the ve‐
hicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐
tion.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐
lect individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐
tivation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rele‐
vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor‐
mation on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle equipment
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, equipment
is also described and illustrated that is not
available in your vehicle, e.g., because of the
selected optional equipment or the country-
specific variants.
This also applies for safety-related functions
and systems.
For options and equipment not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Sup‐
plementary Owner's Manuals.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls
are arranged differently than shown in the illus‐
trations.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
Seite 6
Notes
6
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐
pendix of the printed quick reference for the
vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair
methods.
Therefore, have this work performed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐
ately trained personnel.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.
Parts and Accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac‐
cessories approved by BMW. When you pur‐
chase accessories tested and approved by
BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane‐
ously acquire the assurance that they have
been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure op‐
timum performance when installed on your ve‐
hicle. BMW warrants these parts to be free
from defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and acces‐
sories not approved by BMW. BMW cannot
test every product made by other manufactur‐
ers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely
and without risk to either the vehicle, its opera‐
tion, or its occupants. Genuine BMW Parts,
BMW Accessories and other products ap‐
proved by BMW, together with professional
advice on using these items, are available from
all BMW centers. Installation and operation of
non-BMW approved accessories such as
alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors,
wheels, suspension components, brake dust
shields, telephones, including operation of any
mobile phone from within the vehicle without
using an externally mounted antenna, or trans‐
ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-
talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may
cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com‐
promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's
electrical system or affect the validity of the
BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center
for additional information. Maintenance, re‐
placement, or repair of the emission control
devices and systems may be performed by any
automotive repair establishment or individual
using any certified automotive part.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
Seite 7
Notes
7
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐
ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please contact
Customer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Data memory
Many electronic components on your vehicle
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
and faults. This technical information generally
documents the state of a component, a mod‐
ule, a system or the environment:
▷ Operating states of system components,
fill levels for instance.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from
its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐
tion speed/ vehicle speed, deceleration,
transverse acceleration.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions, e.g., deployment of an airbag, en‐
gagement of stability control systems.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
This data is purely technical in nature and is
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
routes traveled cannot be created from this
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
pair services, service processes, warranty
claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐
mation can be read out from the event and
fault memories by the service personnel, in‐
cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐
nostic tools. You can obtain further information
there if it is needed. After a fault is corrected,
the information in the fault memory is deleted
or overwritten on a continuous basis.
When the vehicle is in use, situations are con‐
ceivable in which it might be possible to asso‐
ciate this technical data with individuals if it is
combined with other information, e.g., an acci‐
dent report, damage to the vehicle, eye wit‐
ness accounts — possibly with the assistance
of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐
Seite 8
Notes
8
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
cating in an emergency, enable certain vehicle
data to be transmitted from the vehicle.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data, e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehi‐
cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 9
Notes
9
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
All around the steering wheel
1 Roller sunblind 42
2 Power windows 41
3 Exterior mirror operation 51
4 Driver assistance systems
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 112
Intelligent Safety 99
Lane departure warning 110
Night Vision with pedestrian de‐
tection 107
Head-up Display 148
5 Lamps
Front fog lamps 89
Parking lamps 86
Low beams 86
Seite 12
At a glance Cockpit
12
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 87
Daytime running lights 87
Adaptive Light Control 87
High-beam Assistant 88
Instrument lighting 89
6 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 64
High beams, head‐
lamp flasher 64
High-beam Assistant 88
Roadside parking lamps 87
Computer 82
7 Shift paddles 69
8 Steering wheel buttons, left
Store speed 133, 124
Resume speed 135, 127
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐
ing 125
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐
ing 133
Reduce distance 127
Increase distance 127
Congestion Assistant ON/OFF,
Pause 130
Congestion Assistant: setting
cruise control distance 124
Cruise control rocker switch 135, 126
9 Instrument cluster 71
10 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source
Volume
Voice activation 22
Telephone, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication
Thumbwheel for selection lists 82
11 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers 65
Rain sensor 66
Clean the windshields and head‐
lamps 66
12 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 59
13 Automatic Engine Start/Stop
Function 60
14 Horn
15 Steering wheel heating 53
16 Adjust the steering wheel 53
17 Unlocking the hood
Seite 13
Cockpit At a glance
13
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
18 Open the trunk lid 36
All around the center console
1 All around the interior rearview mir‐
ror 15
2 Control Display 16
3 Glove compartment 162
4 Air vent 154
5 Hazard warning system 210
Central locking system 36
6 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
nication
7 Automatic climate control 151
8 Controller with buttons 16
9 Parking brake 62
Automatic Hold 63
10 PDC Park Distance Control 136
Top View 140
Rearview camera 138
Parking assistant 144
Side View 142
HDC Hill Descent Control 118
Seite 14
At a glance Cockpit
14
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
11 Driving Dynamics Control 120
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 116
12 Transmission selector lever
All around the headliner
1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐
quest 210
2 Glass sunroof, powered 42
3 Indicator lamp, front passenger
airbag 93
4 Reading lamps 90
5 Interior lamps 89
Seite 15
Cockpit At a glance
15
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
iDrive
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of a multi‐
tude of switches. Thus, these functions can be
operated from a central location.
Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐
ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's
occupants and to other road users, never at‐
tempt to use the controls or enter information
unless traffic and road conditions allow this.◀
Controls at a glance
Controls
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons
The buttons can be used to open the me‐
nus directly. The controller can be used to
select menu items and create the settings.
Control Display
Hints
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the
care instructions.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
Switching off
1.
Press the button.
2. "Switch off control display"
Switching on
Press the controller again to switch the screen
back on.
Controller
Select menu items and create settings.
1.
Turn.
Seite 16
At a glance iDrive
16
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
2. Press.
3. Move in four directions.
Buttons on controller
Press the but‐
ton
Function
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia
menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL Opens the Telephone menu.
BACK Displays the previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Selecting menu items
Menu items shown in white can be selected.
1.
Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
The current panel is closed and the previ‐
ous panel is displayed.
The previous panel is opened again by
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
current panel is not closed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
Seite 17
iDrive At a glance
17
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
A new panel is opened on top of the previ‐
ous display.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐
cate that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu
When a menu is opened, it generally opens
with the panel that was last selected in that
menu. To display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
displayed.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
This area remains unchanged.
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Changing settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
Seite 18
At a glance iDrive
18
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
1.
Press the button. The main menu is
displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right:
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Telephone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio™ is switched on.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Wireless network reception
strength Symbol flashes: searching
for network.
Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
Seite 19
iDrive At a glance
19
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Symbol Meaning
Text message was received.
Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.
SIM card is missing.
Enter the PIN.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are switched
off.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
1.
Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Saving a function
1.
Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2.
Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds.
Running a function
Press the button.
Seite 20
At a glance iDrive
20
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
The function will run immediately. This means,
for example, that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at the top
edge of the screen.
▷ To display short information: touch the
button.
▷ To display detailed information: touch the
button for an extended period.
Deleting the button assignments
1.
Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. five seconds.
2. "OK"
Entering letters and numbers
General information
1.
Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers:
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the let‐
ter or number.
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Switching between cases, letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or Move the controller up.
Without navigation system
Select the symbol.
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during the
entry for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: town/city names can
be entered using the spelling of language
available on the Control Display.
Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
21
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Voice activation system
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
The concept
▷ Most functions that are displayed on the
Control Display can be operated by spoken
commands via the voice activation system.
The system prompts you to make your en‐
tries.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated
using the voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation
system.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
Set the language, refer to page 85.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
The command is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, operate
the function in this case via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steer‐
ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on which
menu is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Short commands exist for many functions.
Some list entries, e.g., Phone book entries, can
also be selected via the voice activation sys‐
tem. Speak these list entries exactly as they
are displayed in the respective list.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹
For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis‐
played, the commands for the settings are
read out loud.
Seite 22
At a glance Voice activation system
22
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Executing functions using short
commands
Functions on the main menu can be performed
directly by means of short commands, nearly
irrespective of which menu item is currently
selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands of the voice activation
system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication Owner's Manual.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the
current operating options and the most im‐
portant commands for them are an‐
nounced.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the
voice activation system is announced.
Example: playing back a CD
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller.
1.
Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Multimedia‹
The medium last played is played back.
4. ›C D‹
5. ›C D drive‹
6. ›Track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4.
Via short command
Playback of the CD can also be started via a
short command.
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›C D drive track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use
the standard dialog or a shorter version.
In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the
announcements from the system are issued in
an abbreviated form.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the setting.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button while giving an in‐
struction until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Seite 23
Voice activation system At a glance
23
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Notes on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a telephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 210, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 24
At a glance Voice activation system
24
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. The equipment
and functions that are in the vehicle are descri‐
bed therein.
Components of the integrated
Owner's Manual
The integrated Owner's Manual consists of
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or access possibilities.
Quick Reference Guide
Located in the Quick Reference is important
information for the operation of the vehicle, the
operation of basic vehicle functions or for what
to do in the event of a flat tire. This information
can also be displayed during driving.
Search by pictures
Information and descriptions based on illustra‐
tions can be searched via search by pictures.
This is helpful, for example, if the description of
an outfitting package that cannot be named is
needed.
Owner's Manual
Information and descriptions can be searched
by direct entry of a search term via the index.
Select components
1.
Press the button.
2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info".
3. Press the controller.
4. Selecting desired range:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
page is displayed.
Page by page without link access
Leaf through the pages directly while skipping
the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
the controller to leaf from page to page.
Leaf back.
Leaf forward.
Seite 25
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
25
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Context help - Owner's Manual to the
temporarily selected function
The relevant information can be opened di‐
rectly.
Opening via the iDrive
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the options menu:
1.
Press the button or move the control‐
ler to the right repeatedly until the
"Options" menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
switch between the two displays:
1. Press the button or move the control‐
ler to the right repeatedly until the
"Options" menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press the button again to return to
the function displayed last.
5.
Press the button to return to the page
of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To switch back and forth repeatedly between
the function displayed last and the page of the
Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4
and 5. This opens a new panel every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly.
Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.
2.
Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press the button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.
Seite 26
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
26
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Seite 27
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
27
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that
are useful for driving and your safety, comfort
and convenience are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Trunk lid
4 Panic mode, headl. courtesy delay feat.
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with keys.
Every remote control contains a replaceable
battery.
The settings called up and implemented when
the car is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the car. Personal Pro‐
file, refer to page 31.
Information on the required maintenance is
stored in the remote control as well. Service
data in the remote control, refer to page 202
Integrated key
Press the button on the back of the remote
control, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door.
▷ Storage compartment in the center arm‐
rest.
The storage compartment contains a switch
for separately securing the trunk lid, refer to
page 37.
Replacing the battery
1.
Take the integrated key out of the remote
control.
2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
ment; see arrow 2.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing upwards.
5. Press the cover closed.
Seite 30
Controls Opening and closing
30
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Take the used battery to a recycling
center or to your service center.
New remote controls
You can obtain new remote controls from your
service center.
Loss of the remote controls
Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
service center.
Emergency detection of remote
control
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start
the engine in situations such as the following:
▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐
mote control by external sources.
▷ Discharged battery in the remote control.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by mo‐
bile devices in close proximity to the re‐
mote control.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by
charger while charging items such as mo‐
bile devices in the vehicle.
A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start
the engine.
Starting the engine with emergency
detection of the remote control
Automatic transmission: if a corresponding
Check Control message appears, hold the re‐
mote control, as shown, against the marked
area on the steering column and press the
Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while
pressing the brake.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set several of your vehicle's functions
to suit your personal needs and preferences.
▷ The settings are automatically saved in the
profile currently activated.
▷ The remote control used is detected when
the vehicle is unlocked and the stored pro‐
file is called up.
▷ Your personal settings will be recognized
and called up again even if the vehicle has
been used in the meantime by someone
else with another remote control.
The individual settings are stored for three
Personal Profiles and one guest profile.
Transmitting the settings
Your personal settings can be taken with you
to another vehicle equipped with the Personal
Profile function. For more information, contact
your service center.
Transmission takes place via:
▷ The USB interface in the center armrest
onto a USB device.
▷ BMW Online.
Profile management
Opening the profiles
A different profile can be called up than the
one associated with the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Select a profile.
Called up profile is assigned to the remote
control being used at the time.
Seite 31
Opening and closing Controls
31
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Renaming profiles
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Rename current profile"
Resetting profiles
The settings of the active profile are reset to
their default values.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reset current profile"
Importing profiles
Existing settings and contacts are overwritten
with the imported profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface, refer to page 162: "USB
device"
Exporting profiles
Most settings of the active profile and the
saved contacts can be exported.
This can be helpful for securing and retrieving
personal settings, before delivering the vehicle
to a workshop for example.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface, refer to page 162: "USB
device"
Using the guest profile
The guest profile can be used to make individ‐
ual settings without affecting the three Per‐
sonal Profiles.
This can be useful for drivers who are using
the vehicle temporarily and do not have their
own profile.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
3. Open "Guest".
4. Create the settings.
Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed.
Display profile list during start
The profile list can be displayed during each
start for selecting the desired profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display user list at startup"
Personal Profile settings
The following functions and settings can be
stored in a profile.
▷ Collision warning: warning time.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ CD/Multimedia: audio source listened to
last.
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle: settings.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control: sport program.
▷ Driver's seat position: automatic retrieval
after unlocking.
▷ Programmable memory buttons: assign‐
ment.
▷ Head-up Display: selection, brightness,
position and rotation of the display.
▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature: time set‐
ting.
Seite 32
Controls Opening and closing
32
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
▷ Tone: tone settings.
▷ Automatic climate control: settings.
▷ Steering wheel position.
▷ Navigation: map views, route criteria, voice
output on/off.
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian detection.
▷ Intelligent Safety: individual settings.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC: adjusting the
signal tone volume.
▷ Radio: stored stations, station listened to
last, special settings.
▷ Rearview camera: selection of functions
and type of display.
▷ Side View: selection of the display type.
▷ Language on the Control Display.
▷ Lane departure warning: last setting, on/
off.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection: last setting,
on/off.
▷ Daytime running lights: current setting.
▷ Triple turn signal activation.
▷ Locking the vehicle: after a brief period or
after starting to drive.
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system becomes active
when the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and re‐
leases the locks on the following:
▷ Doors.
▷ Trunk lid.
▷ Fuel filler flap.
Operating from the outside
▷ Via the remote control.
▷ Via the driver's door lock.
▷ Via the door handles.
▷ Via the button in the trunk lid.
The following takes place simultaneously
when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the re‐
mote control:
▷ Depending on how the vehicle is equipped,
the theft protection is activated/deacti‐
vated. Theft protection prevents the doors
from being unlocked using the lock but‐
tons or the door opener.
▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
courtesy lamps are switched on and off.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 40, is
armed or disarmed.
Operating from the inside
Via the button for the central locking system.
If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the
fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
central locking system unlocks automatically.
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
come on.
Seite 33
Opening and closing Controls
33
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Opening and closing: from
the outside
Using the remote control
General information
Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle
can then be opened from the outside.◀
Unlocking
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol.
The vehicle is unlocked.
Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesy
lamps are switched on.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
Create the settings, refer to page 39.
Convenient opening
The remote control can be used to simultane‐
ously open the windows and the glass sunroof.
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control.
The windows are opened, the glass sunroof is
tilted and the sliding visor moves back.
Releasing the button stops the motion.
Locking
Press the button on the remote control.
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot
be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Switching on interior lamps and
courtesy lamps
Press the button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching on the headlamp courtesy
delay feature
Briefly press the button on the remote
control.
The duration can be set in the Control Display.
Opening the trunk lid
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it
was previously locked or unlocked.
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk
lid can only be opened using the remote con‐
trol if the vehicle has been unlocked.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the trunk lid is closed.◀
The trunk lid is locked again as soon as it is
pushed closed.
Seite 34
Controls Opening and closing
34
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Malfunction
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐
locked with the remote control, the battery
may be discharged or there may be interfer‐
ence from external sources such as mobile
phones, metal objects, overhead power lines,
transmission towers, etc.
If this occurs, lock or unlock the driver's door at
the door lock using the integrated key.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
▷ LX8CAS.
▷ LX8CAS2.
▷ MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Using the door lock
General information
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot
be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Remove the key before pulling the door
handle
Before pulling the outside door handle, remove
the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and
the key.◀
In some country-specific versions, the alarm
system is triggered if the vehicle is unlocked
via the door lock.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of
the remote control.
In some vehicle equipment versions, only the
driver's door can be unlocked or locked via the
door lock.
Locking the doors and trunk lid at
once
To lock all doors and the trunk lid at once:
1.
With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us‐
ing the button for the central locking sys‐
tem in the interior.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐
senger door.
3. Lock the vehicle.
Seite 35
Opening and closing Controls
35
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
▷ Lock the driver's door using the
integrated key in the door lock, or
▷ Press down the lock button of the front
passenger door and close the door
from the outside.
The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the
remote control.
Manual operation
If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or un‐
lock the vehicle using the integrated key via
the door lock on the driver's door.
Opening and closing: from
the inside
Locking and unlocking
Pressing the buttons locks and unlocks the
doors and the trunk lid when the doors are
closed, but they are not secured against theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Unlocking and opening
▷ Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the arm‐
rest or
▷ Pull the door opener twice individually on
each door: the first time unlocks the door,
the second time opens it.
Doors
Automatic Soft Closing
To close the doors, push lightly.
It is closed automatically.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Trunk lid
Opening
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
Opening from the outside
▷ Press on the top half of the BMW emblem.
▷ Press the button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second.
Opening from the inside
Push the button in the driver's foot‐
well.
If the vehicle is stationary, the trunk lid opens if
it is not locked.
Seite 36
Controls Opening and closing
36
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Closing
Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk
lid make it easier to pull down the lid.
Keep the closing path clear
Make sure that the closing path of the
trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐
sult.◀
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the trunk lid is closed.◀
Locking the vehicle
Press the button on the inside of the trunk lid.
When the driver's door is closed, the vehicle is
completely locked.
Locking separately
The trunk lid can be locked separately with the
switch in the front passenger glove compart‐
ment.
▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1.
▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐
row 2.
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This
secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from
the central locking system.
If the center arm rest is locked, the trunk lid
cannot be opened.
This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked
using valet service. The infrared remote con‐
trol can be handed out without the key.
Emergency unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The trunk lid unlocks.
Comfort Access
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is nearby or in the passenger
compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
Seite 37
Opening and closing Controls
37
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
▷ Unlocking of the trunk lid separately.
▷ Start the engine.
Functional requirements
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence nearby.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
mote control is inside the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
The functions can be controlled by pressing
the buttons of the remote control or Comfort
Access.
Unlocking
Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1.
This corresponds to pressing the button
on the remote control.
Locking
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2,
with your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the button
on the remote control.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐
hicle.
Convenient closing
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2,
with the finger and hold it down.
In addition to locking, the windows and the
glass sunroof are closed.
Monitor the closing process
Monitor the closing process to ensure
that no one becomes trapped.◀
Unlocking the trunk lid separately
Press on the top half of the BMW emblem on
the trunk lid.
This corresponds to pressing the
but‐
ton on the remote control.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the trunk lid is closed.◀
Seite 38
Controls Opening and closing
38
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Malfunction
Comfort Access may not function properly if it
experiences interference from external sour‐
ces such as mobile phones, metal objects,
overhead power lines, transmission towers,
etc.
In this case, open or close the vehicle using the
buttons on the remote control or use the
integrated key in the door lock.
Adjusting
Unlocking
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select symbol or "Unlock button:"
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped or
the country-specific variant, you can set
whether the doors are also unlocked with the
button on the remote control.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
mation signals.
▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Automatic locking
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the desired function:
▷ "Lock if no door opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if a door is not
opened.
▷ "Lock after start driving"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive away.
Retrieving the seat, mirror, and
steering wheel settings
The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering
wheel positions selected last are stored for the
currently used remote control.
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions
are automatically retrieved if this function was
activated.
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
If this function is used, first make sure
that the footwell behind the driver's seat is
empty. Otherwise, people can be injured or ob‐
jects damaged when the seat is moved back.◀
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
▷ When a button of the seat, mirror, and
steering wheel memory is pressed briefly.
Activating the setting
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. "Last seat position autom."
Seite 39
Opening and closing Controls
39
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds to:
▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the trunk
lid.
▷ Movements in the vehicle.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐
tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the
car.
▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the high beams.
Arming and disarming the alarm
system
General information
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either
with the remote control, Comfort Access or at
the door lock the alarm system is armed or dis‐
armed at the same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system
Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the
alarm on some country-specific versions.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of
the remote control.
Trunk lid and armed alarm system
The trunk lid can be opened even when the
alarm system is armed.
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and
monitored again if the doors are locked. The
hazard warning system flashes once.
In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk
lid can only be opened using the remote con‐
trol if the vehicle was unlocked first.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐
trol.
▷ With Comfort Access: If you are carrying
the remote control with you, pull on the
driver side or front passenger side door
handle.
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
mirror
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The system is armed.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐
cured.
Seite 40
Controls Opening and closing
40
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp
flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐
sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off together, such as in
the following situations:
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Power windows
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐
jure themselves.◀
Opening
▷
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening, refer to page 34, via the
remote control.
Closing
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is
held.
Seite 41
Opening and closing Controls
41
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically.
Pressing the switch stops the motion.
Convenient closing, refer to page 38, with
Comfort Access.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as
a window closes, the closing action is inter‐
rupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
No window accessories
Do not install any accessories in the
range of movement of the windows; otherwise,
the pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
For example, if there is an external danger or if
ice on the windows prevents a window from
closing normally, proceed as follows:
1.
Pull the switch past the resistance point
and hold it there.
The pinch protection is limited and the
window reopens slightly if the closing force
exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without pinch protec‐
tion.
Roller sunblind
General information
If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐
blind for the rear window after having activated
it a number of times in a row, the system is
blocked for a limited time to prevent overheat‐
ing. Let the system cool.
The roller sunblind for the rear window cannot
be moved at low interior temperatures.
Driver's door controls
Roller blind for rear window
Press the button.
Glass sunroof, powered with
tilt function
General information
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
tion is switched on.
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof
is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Seite 42
Controls Opening and closing
42
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them‐
selves.◀
Tilting up and closing glass sunroof
▷ Push switch upward briefly.
The closed roof is tilted and
the sliding visor opens
slightly.
▷ Briefly press out the switch
twice in succession toward
the rear past the resistance
point.
Closed roof is raised and the
sliding visor moves all the
way back.
▷ To close the switch, press upward briefly
or twice forward past the resistance point.
Convenient operation, refer to page 34, via the
remote control.
Convenient closing, refer to page 38, with
Comfort Access.
Opening/closing the sliding visor
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
The sliding visor moves
while the switch is being
held.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
The sliding visor moves automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo‐
tion.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as
a glass sunroof closes, the closing action is in‐
terrupted.
The sunroof is tilted again.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check
that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise,
the closing action may not be interrupted in
certain extreme situations, such as when thin
objects are present.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system
If there is an external danger or if, e. g., icing of
the glass sunroof prevents automatic closing,
push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold it.
The roof closes without pinch protection.
Initializing after a power failure
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the roof can only be operated
to a limited extent.
Initializing the system
The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
During the initialization, the roof closes without
pinch protection.
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof
is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Seite 43
Opening and closing Controls
43
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is com‐
plete:
▷ Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is com‐
pleted when the sunroof and
sliding visor are completely
closed.
▷ The roof closes without pinch protection.
Seite 44
Controls Opening and closing
44
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Adjusting
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 48.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 49.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 91.
Seats
Adjusting
General information
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐
ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected
movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle
control could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the
rear
Also on the front passenger side, do not incline
the backrest on the front passenger side too
far to the rear during driving, or there is a risk of
slipping under the safety belt in the event of an
accident. This would eliminate the protection
normally provided by the belt.◀
At a glance
1 Active seat
2 Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory
3 Backrest width
4 Lumbar support
5 Backrest, head restraint
6 Shoulder support
7 Forward/back, height, tilt
8 Thigh support
Note
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the remote control currently in use. When
the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control,
the position is automatically retrieved if the
Function, refer to page 39, for this is activated.
Adjustments in detail
1.
Forward/back.
Seite 45
Adjusting Controls
45
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
2. Height.
3. Seat tilt.
4. Backrest tilt.
Thigh support
Multifunctional seat
Adjust the position using the lever.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch.
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
Change the width of the back‐
rest using the side wings to ad‐
just the lateral support.
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,
the backrest width temporarily opens fully.
Seite 46
Controls Adjusting
46
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Shoulder support
Also supports the back in the shoulder area:
▷ Results in a relaxed seating position.
▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.
Active seat
Active adjustment of the seat cushion's con‐
tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue to
help prevent lower back pain.
Press the button. The LED lights up.
Front seat heating
Switching on
Press the button once for each tem‐
perature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 174, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Temperature distribution
The heating action in the seat cushion and
backrest can be distributed in different ways.
1.
"Climate"
2. "Front seat heating"
3. Select the required seat.
4. Turn the controller to set the temperature
distribution.
Active seat ventilation, front
The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are
cooled by means of integrated fans.
The ventilation cools the seat, e. g., if the vehi‐
cle interior is overheated or for continuous
cooling at high temperatures.
Seite 47
Adjusting Controls
47
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Switching on
Press the button once for each venti‐
lation level.
The highest level is active when three LEDs
are lit.
After a short time, the system automatically
moves down one level in order to prevent ex‐
cessive cooling.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Safety belts
Seats with safety belt
The vehicle has four seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
Hints
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
One person per safety belt
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or
small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀
Putting on the belt
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies
low around the hips in the lap area and does
not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt
can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal
impact and injure the abdomen.
The safety belt must not lie across the neck,
rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid or
breakable objects, or be pinched.◀
Reduction of restraining effect
Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the
belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder
belt periodically to readjust the tension across
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the
safety belt may be reduced.◀
Buckling the belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
Unbuckling the belt
1.
Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
Safety belt reminder for driver's and
passenger's seat
The indicator lamp flashes or lights up
and a signal sounds. Make sure that
the safety belts are positioned cor‐
rectly. The safety belt reminder is active at
speeds above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can
also be activated if objects are placed on the
front passenger seat.
Damage to safety belts
In the case of strain caused by accidents or
damage:
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
checked.
Seite 48
Controls Adjusting
48
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Checking and replacing safety belts
Have the work performed only by your
service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
that this safety feature will function properly.◀
Front Head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
Active head restraint
In the event of a rear-end collision with a cer‐
tain severity, the active head restraint automat‐
ically reduces the distance from the head.
Reduced protective function
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint
covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
on the head restraints.
▷ Only attach accessories approved by BMW
to the seat or head restraint.
Otherwise, the protective function of the active
head restraint will be impaired and the per‐
sonal safety of the occupants will be endan‐
gered.◀
In the case of strain caused by accidents or
damage:
Have the active headrest checked and if nec‐
essary replaced.
Adjusting the height
Adjusting electrically.
Distance to the back of the head
▷ Forward: pull.
▷ Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
Adjusting the side extensions
Fold forward for increased lateral support in
the resting position.
Seite 49
Adjusting Controls
49
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Entering the rear
Note
Folding back and locking the backrest
Before driving away, fold back and lock
the backrests; otherwise, an unexpected seat
movement may cause an accident.◀
Unlocking the backrest
1.
Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold backrest forward.
Changing the seat position
Requirements
▷ Vehicle at a standstill.
▷ When the door is open, the seat is accessi‐
ble from the side on which the door is
open.
Controls
▷ Press and hold the button until the seat
has moved to the desired position. Releas‐
ing the button stops the motion.
▷ Press the button briefly. The seat automat‐
ically moves to the respective end position.
Pressing again stops the motion.
Folding back and locking the backrest
After entering the rear, fold the backrest back
and lock it.
Press the button. The seat moves to its
original position. Pressing again stops
the motion.
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory
General information
Two different driver's seat, exterior mirror, and
steering wheel positions can be stored and re‐
trieved for each remote control. The adjust‐
ment of the lumbar support is not stored.
Seite 50
Controls Adjusting
50
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Storing
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3.
Press the button. The LED in the
button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED
goes out.
If the M button is pressed accidentally:
Press the button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
Do not retrieve the memory while driving
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving, as an unexpected movement of the
seat or steering wheel could result in an acci‐
dent.◀
Comfort function
1.
Open the driver's door.
2. Switch off the ignition.
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Safety mode
1.
Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐
nition.
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2
until the adjustment procedure is com‐
pleted.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, the calling up of stored
seat positions is deactivated to save battery
power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open or close the door or trunk lid.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
At a glance
1 Adjusting
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Fold in and out
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
Estimating distances correctly
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you
see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk
of an accident.◀
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the
mirror setting is stored for the remote control
in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐
mote control, the position is automatically re‐
trieved if the setting for this function is active.
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the mirror changeover switch.
Seite 51
Adjusting Controls
51
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direc‐
tion in which the button is pressed.
Saving positions
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 50.
Adjusting manually
If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
press the edges of the mirror glass.
Automatic Curb Monitor
When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
senger side. This improves your view of the
curb and other low-lying obstacles when park‐
ing, for example.
Activating
1. Slide the mirror changeover switch
to the driver's side mirror position.
2. Engage transmission position R.
Deactivating
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
senger's side mirror position.
Fold in and out
Press the button.
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
▷ In car washes.
▷ In narrow streets.
▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before washing the car in an automatic
car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or
with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could
be damaged, depending on the width of the
vehicle.◀
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature
Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐
med. Photocells are used for control in the In‐
terior rear view mirror, refer to page 52.
Interior rearview mirror, automatic
dimming feature
The concept
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirement
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Seite 52
Controls Adjusting
52
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Steering wheel
General information
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀
Adjusting
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐
rections.
Storing the position
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 50.
Assistance getting in and out
The steering wheel temporarily moves into the
highest position to make it easier to enter and
exit the vehicle.
Steering wheel heating
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 53
Adjusting Controls
53
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Transporting children safely
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
The right place for children
Note
Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the
doors.◀
Children should always be in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat.
Transporting children in the rear
Only transport children younger than
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in
the rear in child restraint fixing systems pro‐
vided in accordance with the age, weight and
size of the child; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury in an accident.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
fixing system can no longer be used, due to
their age, weight and size.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint fixing system in the front passenger
seat, make sure that the front, knee and side
airbags on the front passenger side are deacti‐
vated. Automatic deactivation of front passen‐
ger side airbags, refer to page 93.
Note
Deactivated front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐
straint fixing system.◀
Installing child restraint
fixing systems
Hints
Manufacturer's information for child re‐
straint fixing systems
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
systems, observe the information provided by
the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
tective effect can be impaired.◀
Lock the rear seat backrests in position
Before installing a child restraint system,
make sure that the rear seat backrests are
locked; otherwise, the protective effect is not
guaranteed and there is an increased risk of in‐
jury for the child in the event of an accident.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
After installing a child restraint fixing system in
the front passenger seat, make sure that the
front, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐
senger side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto‐
matically, refer to page 93.
Seite 54
Controls Transporting children safely
54
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐
straint fixing system.◀
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint fixing system,
move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and adjust its height to the highest
position to obtain the best possible position for
the belt and to offer optimal protection in the
event of an accident.
Do not change the seat position and height af‐
ter this.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint fixing system in the front pas‐
senger seat, open the backrest width com‐
pletely. Do not change the backrest width
again and do not call up a memory position.
Backrest width for the child seat
Before installing a child restraint fixing
system in the front passenger seat, the back‐
rest width must be opened completely. Do not
change the adjustment after this; otherwise,
the stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be locked against pulling out for
mounting the child restraint fixing systems.
Locking the safety belt
1.
Pull out the belt webbing completely.
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system
with the belt.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
system. The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1.
Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil‐
dren.
Note
Manufacturer's information for LATCH
child restraint fixing systems
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint
fixing systems, observe the operating and
safety information from the system manufac‐
turer; otherwise, the level of protection may be
reduced.◀
Seite 55
Transporting children safely Controls
55
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restr- ained by the internal harnesses.
Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint
fixing system is resting snugly against the
backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection
offered may be reduced.◀
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing system, pull the belt away from the child
restraint fixing system.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐
cated in the gap between the seat and back‐
rest.
Mounting ISOFIX child restraint fixing
systems
1.
Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐
fer to the user's manual of the system.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint fixing system with a
tether strap
Mounting points
There are two mounting points for child re‐
straint fixing systems with a tether strap.
Note
Mounting eyes
Only use the mounting eyes for the up‐
per retaining strap to secure child restraint fix‐
ing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes
could be damaged.◀
Retaining strap guide
Retaining strap
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as
it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the
strap will not properly secure the child restraint
fixing system in the event of an accident.◀
1 Direction of travel
2 Upper retaining strap
Seite 56
Controls Transporting children safely
56
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
3 Head restraint.
4 Rear window shelf
5 Mounting point/eye
6 Hook for upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1. Lift the cover over the mounting point.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap over the
head restraint.
3. Attach the hooks of the retaining strap to
the mounting eyes.
4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
Seite 57
Transporting children safely Controls
57
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Driving
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Start/Stop button
The concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off
and starts the engine.
Automatic transmission: The
engine starts if the brake is de‐
pressed while pressing the Start/Stop button.
Ignition on
Automatic transmission: Press the Start/Stop
button but do not depress the brake.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster light up for varying lengths
of time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
The ignition switches off automatically:
▷ When locking the vehicle, even if the low
beams are switched on.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
Note
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
switched on, the system automatically
switches to the radio ready state when the
door is opened if the lights are switched off or
the daytime running lights are switched on.
Ignition off
Automatic transmission: Press the Start/Stop
button again, but do not depress the brake.
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Transmission position P with the ignition
off
When the ignition is switched off, position P is
engaged automatically. When in an automatic
car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition
is not switched off accidentally.◀
The ignition automatically cuts off while the
vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
low beams are activated.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started. This function is only available
when the low beams are switched off.
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
low beams are switched off.
▷ While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, if
the driver's door is open and the low
beams are switched off.
When the ignition is switched off, by opening
or closing the driver's door or unbuckling the
driver's seat belt, the radio ready state remains
active.
Seite 58
Controls Driving
58
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Radio ready state
Activate radio ready state:
▷ When the engine is running: press the
Start/Stop button.
Some electronic systems/power consumers
remain ready for operation.
The radio ready state switches off automati‐
cally:
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐
tral locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
Starting the engine
Hints
Enclosed areas
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes
may lead to loss of consciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless but highly toxic
gas.◀
Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with
the engine running; doing so poses a risk of
danger.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐
mission in position P or neutral to prevent the
vehicle from moving.◀
Repeated starting in quick succession
Avoid repeated unsuccessful attempts to
start the vehicle or starting the vehicle several
times in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel
is not burned or is inadequately burned, posing
a risk of overheating and damage to the cata‐
lytic converter.◀
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at
moderate engine speeds.
Automatic transmission
Starting the engine
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
gine starts.
Engine stop
Hints
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot start the engine.◀
Set the parking brake and further secure
the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐
hicle, for example, by turning the steering
wheel in the direction of the curb. ◀
Before driving into a car wash
In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a
car wash, heed the information regarding
Washing in automatic car washes, refer to
page 215.
Automatic transmission
Switching off the engine
1.
Engage transmission position P with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
Seite 59
Driving Controls
59
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
The radio ready state is switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
Automatic Engine Start/Stop
Function
The concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, e.g., in a traffic congestion or at traffic
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
engine starts again automatically for driving
off.
Certain vehicle components may experience
additional wear as a result of this system.
Automatic mode
The Auto Start/Stop function is operational af‐
ter each engine start.
This function is activated at speeds faster than
about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.
Engine stop
The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
ing a stop under the following conditions:
Automatic transmission:
▷ The selector lever is in transmission posi‐
tion D.
▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the
vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held
by Automatic Hold.
▷ The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv‐
er's door is closed.
The air volume of the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The display indicates that the
automatic engine start-stop
function is ready for an auto‐
matic engine start.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been satis‐
fied.
Note
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The passenger compartment has not yet
been heated or cooled to the required
level.
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐
ature.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
▷ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ The transmission selector lever is in posi‐
tion N or M/S.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ Automatic transmission:
By releasing the brake pedal.
When Automatic Hold is activated: press
the accelerator.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Seite 60
Controls Driving
60
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met.
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lamps light up for varying
lengths of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
Note
Even if driving away was not intended, the de‐
activated engine starts up automatically in the
following situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the passenger com‐
partment when the cooling function is
switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
position is changed from D to N, R, or M/S.
▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
position is changed from P to N, D, R or
M/S.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Excessive cooling of the passenger com‐
partment when the heating is switched on.
Activating/deactivating the system
manually
Using the button
Press the button.
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start Stop function is
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function is
activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, e.g., when
leaving it.
1.
Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
Transmission position P is engaged auto‐
matically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐
sons, such as when the driver is detected to be
absent.
Seite 61
Driving Controls
61
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches of the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked.
Parking brake
The concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐
cle from rolling when it is parked.
Setting
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models
Set the parking brake and further secure
the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐
hicle, for example, by turning the steering
wheel in the direction of the curb. ◀
While driving
Use while driving serves as an emergency
braking function:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the switch is being pulled.
The indicator lamp lights up red, a sig‐
nal sounds and the brake lamps light
up.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models.
If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx.
2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake remains set.
Releasing
With the ignition switched on:
Automatic transmission: Press the
switch while the brake is pressed or
transmission position P is engaged.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic Release in cars with
automatic transmission
For automatic release, operate the accelerator
pedal.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
Subject to the following requirements, the
parking brake is automatically released by op‐
eration of the accelerator pedal:
▷ Engine on.
▷ Drive position engaged.
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
Inadvertent operation of the accelerator
pedal
Make sure that the accelerator pedal is not op‐
erated unintentionally; otherwise, the vehicle is
set in motion and there is a risk of an acci‐
dent.◀
Seite 62
Controls Driving
62
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Automatic Hold
The concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling backward when driving away.
For your safety
Under the following conditions, Automatic
Hold is automatically deactivated and the park‐
ing brake is set:
▷ The engine is switched off.
▷ A door is opened and driver's safety belt is
unbuckled while the vehicle is stationary.
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand‐
still using the parking brake.
The indicator lamp switches from
green to red and the letters AUTO H go
out.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models.
Leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
mission and ensure that the parking brake is
set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
Activating
This function can be activated when the driv‐
er's door is closed and the safety belt is fas‐
tened, and while driving.
Press the button.
The LED and the letters AUTO H light
up.
The indicator lamp lights up.
Automatic Hold is activated.
Deactivating
Press the button again.
The LED and the letters AUTO H go
out.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.
When the parking brake is set manually, Auto‐
matic Hold is deactivated automatically.
Driving
Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is au‐
tomatically secured against rolling after brak‐
ing to a standstill.
The indicator lamp lights up green.
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive
off.
The brake is released automatically.
The indicator lamp goes out.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian mod‐
els
Before driving into a car wash
Before driving into the car wash, deacti‐
vate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the parking
brake will be set when the vehicle is stationary
and the vehicle will no longer be able to roll.◀
Seite 63
Driving Controls
63
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Parking
The parking brake is automatically set if the
engine is switched off while the vehicle is be‐
ing held by Automatic Hold.
The indicator lamp changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set if the en‐
gine is switched off while the vehicle is
coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is
deactivated.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian mod‐
els
Automatic Hold remains activated during the
engine stop brought about by the Auto Start/
Stop function.
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot release the parking brake.◀
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing using a wheel chock, for example, when
leaving it.
After a power failure
Only put the parking brake into operation
after a power failure
The parking brake should only be put into op‐
eration again if it was manually released due to
an interruption in the supply of electrical
power. Otherwise, it cannot be ensured that
the parking brake will function properly.◀
Putting the parking brake into
operation
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2.
Press the switch while the brake is
depressed or transmission position P is
engaged.
It may take several seconds for the brake to be
put into operation. Any sounds associated with
this are normal.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlamp flasher
Turn signal
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Seite 64
Controls Driving
64
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
High beams, headlamp flasher
▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Do not switch on the wipers if they are
frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the
wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor
may be damaged.◀
No wiper operation on dry windshield
Do not use the windshield wipers if the
windshield is dry, as this may damage the
wiper blades or cause them to become worn
more quickly.◀
Switching on
Press the wiper levers up.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Normal wiping speed: press up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press
once beyond the resistance point.
The wipers switch to normal speed when
the vehicle is stationary.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the wiper levers down.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down
once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Seite 65
Driving Controls
65
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Rain sensor
The concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐
ror.
Activating/deactivating
Press the button on the wiper lever.
The LED in the wiper lever lights up and a wip‐
ing operation is started. At temperatures below
32 ℉/0 ℃, a wiping operation is not started.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise,
damage could be caused by undesired wiper
activation.◀
Rain sensor, sensitivity
Turn the thumbwheel.
Clean the windshield, headlamps
Pull the wiper lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regu‐
lar intervals when the vehicle lights are
switched on.
Do not use the washer system at freezing
temperatures
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
reason, use antifreeze.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
pump.◀
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Required when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for example.
1.
Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐
shield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly
vertical position.
Seite 66
Controls Driving
66
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
Fold the wipers back down
Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; other‐
wise, the wipers may become damaged when
they are switched on.◀
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers
move to their resting position and are
ready for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable and can cause
injury if it is used incorrectly.
Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni‐
tion.
Only keep it in the closed original container
and inaccessible to children.
Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐
tainer.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐
centrate or the equivalent.◀
Washer fluid reservoir
Adding washer fluid
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to
avoid contact between the washer fluid and
hot engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir.
Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐
centrate and tap water and – if required – with a
washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐
turer's recommendations.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
the correct mixing ratio.
Do not add windshield washer concentrate and
antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure
water; this could damage the wiper system.
Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐
ferent manufacturers, because otherwise it can
result in clogging of the windshield washer
nozzles.
For the capacity, refer to technical data.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
Transmission positions
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
ward gears are available.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
Use in automatic car washes, for example. The
vehicle can roll.
Seite 67
Driving Controls
67
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
When the ignition is switched off, refer to
page 58, position P is engaged automatically.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
▷ After the engine is switched off when the
vehicle is in radio ready state, refer to
page 59, or when the ignition is switched
off, refer to page 58, and when position R
or D is engaged.
▷ With the ignition is off, if position N is en‐
gaged.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's
door is opened, and the brake pedal is not
pressed while the vehicle is stationary and
transmission position R or D is engaged.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that posi‐
tion P of the automatic transmission is en‐
gaged. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to
roll.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the gas pedal beyond
the resistance point at the full throttle position.
Engaging the transmission position
▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐
gaged if the engine is running and the
brake pedal is pressed.
▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be
executed: shift lock.
Depress the brake until you start
driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a driving position, maintain
pressure on the brake pedal until you are
ready to start.◀
Engaging D, R and N
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to
its center position.
Press unlock button, in order to:
▷ Engage R.
▷ Shift out of P.
Engaging P
Press button P.
Seite 68
Controls Driving
68
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Sport program and manual mode
Activating the sport program
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
In the instrument cluster, DS is displayed, or
the engaged gear, e.g., S1 with the Sport auto‐
matic transmission.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
Activating the M/S manual mode
1.
Push the selector lever to the left out of
transmission position D.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
Once maximum engine speed is attained, or if
the engine is getting too hot, M/S manual
mode is automatically upshifted as needed.
Switching to manual mode
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds and when necessary due to
the temperature of the drivetrain, e.g., down‐
shifting is not possible if the engine speed is
too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Sport automatic transmission: prevent
automatic upshifting in M/S manual
mode
For vehicles with Sport automatic transmis‐
sions, automatic shift operations are not per‐
formed, at maximum engine speed for exam‐
ple, if one of the following conditions is met:
▷ DSC deactivated.
▷ TRACTION activated.
▷ SPORT+ activated.
In addition, the kickdown is deactivated.
Ending the sport program/manual
mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the
transmission temporarily switches to manual
mode.
If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle
is not accelerated for a certain time, the sys‐
tem switches back into automatic mode if the
selector lever is in transmission position D.
Seite 69
Driving Controls
69
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐
sible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Shift lights in the instrument display
The concept
Shift lights display the optimum shift point for
sport displays in the multifunction instrument
display. Thus, with a sporty driving style, the
best possible vehicle acceleration is achieved.
Display in the instrument display
▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the
tachometer.
▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated
fields indicate the upcoming upshift mo‐
ment.
▷ Arrow 2: fields are illuminated in red. Do
not wait any further to shift.
When the maximum possible speed is
reached, the entire display flashes. When the
maximum speed is exceeded, the supply of
fuel is interrupted in order to protect the en‐
gine. Speeds in this range must be avoided.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The transmission position is dis‐
played, e.g.: P.
Seite 70
Controls Driving
70
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Displays
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 77
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator/warning lamps 75
4 Tachometer 77
5 Oil temperature 77
6 Electronic displays 72
7 Reset miles 78
Seite 71
Displays Controls
71
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Electronic displays
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Messages, e.g. Check Control 75
Time 78
2 Range 78
3 Computer 82
4 Navigation display, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
Service requirements 79
Miles/trip miles 78
5 Selection list, e.g., radio 82
Current fuel consumption 79
Energy recovery 79
External temperature 78
Transmission display 70
Multifunctional instrument
display
The concept
The instrument dispaly is a variable display.
When the driving mode is changed, the ap‐
pearance is changed to reflect the new driving
mode. The change of appearance can be de‐
activated in the Control Display.
Some of the displays in the instrument display
may differ from the way they are shown in this
owner's manual.
Seite 72
Controls Displays
72
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
At a glance
1 Fuel gauge 77
2 Indicator/warning lamps 75
3 Speedometer
4 Variable displays
5 Tachometer 77
Selection lists 82
ECO PRO displays 174
6 Oil temperature 77
7 Computer 82
8 Reset miles 78
Switching the change of display on and off
You can set whether the instrument display
automatically changes to the ECO PRO or
SPORT in the display when you switch driving
modes.
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "ECO PRO Info"
or"Driving mode view"
With Professional Navigation System:
switching zoom function on/off
Switching
You can program whether the current speed is
to appear enlarged in the speedometer.
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Magnifier function"
Seite 73
Displays Controls
73
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
ECO PRO displays
1 Speedometer
2 Variable displays: ECO PRO Tips, Deceler‐
ation assistant instructions, Driver assist
system displays
3 Efficiency display 174
4 Transmission display 70
5 ▷ Blue: bonus range
▷ Gray: range
In ECO PRO driving mode, the instrument dis‐
play switches to the ECO PRO displays. These
displays support a driving style that saves on
fuel consumption with more prominent repre‐
sentation of the efficiency display and various
ECO PRO tips.
Seite 74
Controls Displays
74
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Sport displays
1 Speedometer
2 Tachometer
3 Transmission display 70
4 Shift lights, when appropriately equipped
5 Performance display
6 Variable displays
In the Sport and Sport+ modes, the instrument
display switches to the sport displays. This
display supports a sporty driving style with
more prominent representation of the tachom‐
eter, the transmission displays, and the vehicle
speed.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lamps and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may be output
and a text message may appear on the Control
Display.
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps in the instru‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
nations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Seite 75
Displays Controls
75
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Overview: indicator/warning lamps
Symbol Function or system
Turn signal.
Parking brake.
Parking brake in Canadian models.
Automatic hold.
Front fog lamps.
High beams.
High-beam Assistant.
Parking lamps, headlamp control.
Active Cruise Control.
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise
Control: collision warning.
Cruise control.
Lane departure warning.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control or
DTC Dynamic Traction Control
Symbol Function or system
Tire Pressure Monitor.
Flat Tire Monitor.
Safety belts.
Airbag system.
Steering system.
Engine functions.
Engine functions in Canadian mod‐
els.
Brake system.
Brake system in Canadian models.
ABS Antilock Brake System.
ABS Antilock Brake System in
Canadian models.
At least one Check Control mes‐
sage is displayed or is stored.
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol
in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐
trol message and the meaning of the indicator
and warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
a fault or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
Seite 76
Controls Displays
76
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
The supplementary text of urgent messages is
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Symbols
Depending on the Check Control message, the
following functions can be selected.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the
Check Control message in the Integrated
Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request"
Contact the service partner.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the computer button on the turn signal
lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐
eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
sages are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed
again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages that are displayed during
driving are displayed again after the ignition is
switched off.
Fuel gauge
The vehicle inclination may
cause the display to vary.
US models: the arrow beside the
fuel pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler
flap is on.
Hints on refueling, refer to page 182.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐
rupted to protect the engine.
Engine oil temperature
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine
and vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the
middle or in the left half of
the temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐
perature end. A Check Control message is
also displayed.
Seite 77
Displays Controls
77
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Coolant temperature
If the coolant along with the engine becomes
too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 201.
Odometer and trip odometer
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Display/reset miles
Press the knob.
▷ When the ignition is
switched off, the time, the
external temperature and
the odometer are displayed.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
External temperature
External temperature warning
If the indicator drops to
+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
sounds.
A Check Control message is
displayed.
There is the increased danger of ice.
Ice on roads
Even at temperatures above
+37 ℉/+3 ℃, there can be a risk of ice on
roads.
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and
shaded roads, for example, to avoid the in‐
creased risk of an accident.◀
Time
The time is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
Setting the time and time for‐
mat, refer to page 84.
Date
The date is displayed in the
computer.
Setting the date and date for‐
mat, refer to page 85.
Range
After the reserve range is
reached:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the computer.
▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such
as when cornering quickly, operation of the
engine is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is
not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Displaying the cruising range
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Additional indicators"
The range is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Seite 78
Controls Displays
78
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Range when destination guidance is
activated in the navigation system
When destination guidance is
activated in the navigation sys‐
tem, the range up to the desti‐
nation is displayed.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. You can check
whether you are currently driv‐
ing in an efficient and environ‐
mentally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Additional indicators"
The bar display for the current fuel consump‐
tion is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Energy recovery
The kinetic energy of the vehicle
is converted to electrical energy
while coasting. The vehicle bat‐
tery is partially charged and fuel
consumption can be lowered.
Service requirements
Display
The driving distance or the time
to the next scheduled mainte‐
nance is displayed briefly after
the ignition is switched on.
The current service requirements can be read
out from the remote control by the service
specialist.
With TeleService, data regarding the service
status or legally mandated inspections of your
vehicle are automatically transmitted to your
service center before the service due date.
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently re‐
quired.
The deadline for service or a
legally mandated inspection is
approaching.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set
correctly.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Seite 79
Displays Controls
79
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Adjust the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center
before a service due date.
You can check when your service center was
notified.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Gear shift indicator
The concept
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear in the current driving situation.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped and
the country-specific version of the vehicle, the
gear shift indicator is active in the manual
mode of the automatic transmission and in the
manual transmission.
Indicators to shift up or down are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Automatic transmission: displays
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is engaged.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Speed limit detection with
No Passing Information
The concept
Speed limit detection
Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the
shape of a traffic sign to display the currently
detected speed limit. The camera at the base
of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic
signs at the edge of the road as well as variable
overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra
symbols for wet road conditions, etc. are also
detected and compared with vehicle interior
data, such as for the rain sensor, and are dis‐
played depending on the situation. The system
takes into account the information stored in
the navigation system and also displays speed
limits present on routes without signs.
No Passing Information
No Passing Information in the instrument clus‐
ter displays the beginnings and ends of no
passing zones detected by the camera. The
system accounts for only the beginnings and
ends of No Passing zones marked by signs.
No display is shown:
▷ In countries where No Passing zones are
primarily identified with road markings.
▷ On routes without signage.
▷ Where there are railroad crossings, high‐
way markings or other situations where no
Seite 80
Controls Displays
80
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
signage is present, but passing would not
be permitted.
Hints
Personal judgment
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic
situation.
The system assists the driver and does not re‐
place the human eye.◀
At a glance
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Speed limit information"
If speed limit detection is switched on, it can
be displayed on the info display in the instru‐
ment cluster via the onboard computer. No
Passing Information is displayed together with
the activated speed limit information.
Display
The following is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Speed limit detection
Current speed limit.
Speed limit detection is not
available.
Speed limit detection can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
No Passing Information
▷ Start of No Passing zone.
▷ End of No Passing zone.
▷ No Passing Information not
available.
No Passing Information can also be displayed
in the Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are concealed by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered by a sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
Seite 81
Displays Controls
81
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in the road net‐
work.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
Selection lists in the
instrument cluster
The concept
The following can be operated using the but‐
tons and the thumbwheel on the steering
wheel:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial on telephone.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system.
Activating a list and creating the
setting
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
list.
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐
ting and confirm it by pressing the thumb‐
wheel.
Computer
Indication in the info display
The information from the on‐
board computer is shown in the
info display in the instrument
cluster.
Calling up information on the info
display
Press the onboard computer button on the
turn signal lever.
Information is displayed on the info display of
the instrument cluster.
Seite 82
Controls Displays
82
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
signal lever calls up the following information
on the info display:
▷ Range.
▷ Average fuel consumption.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Speed limit detection.
▷ Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Arrow view of navigation system.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
When the arrow view in the Head-up Dis‐
play is inactive.
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
Adjusting the info display
You can select what information from the on‐
board computer is to be displayed on the info
display of the instrument cluster.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. Select the desired displays.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km. If there is only enough
fuel left for less than 45 miles/80 km, the color
of the display changes.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the period during which the engine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
onboard computer.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped do not enter into the
calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold the computer button on the
turn signal lever.
Distance to destination
The distance remaining to the destination is
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
gation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
Time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is
displayed if a destination is en‐
tered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed limit detection
Description of the speed limit detection, refer
to page 80, function.
Speed limit
Display of a speed limit which, when reached,
should cause a warning to be issued.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
drops below the set speed limit once by at
least 3 mph/5 km/h.
Seite 83
Displays Controls
83
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the controller.
Setting your current speed as the limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
limit.
Trip computer
The vehicle features two types of computer.
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an
overview of the current trip.
Resetting the trip computer
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to
a standstill.
Display on the Control Display
Display the onboard computer or trip computer
on the Control Display.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the fuel consumption or
speed
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info"
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
4. "Yes"
Settings on the Control
Display
Time
Setting the time zone
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone"
4. Select the desired time zone.
The time zone is stored.
Setting the time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
7. Press the controller.
The time is stored.
Seite 84
Controls Displays
84
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Setting the time format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
Date
Setting the date
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Language
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 23.
Units of measure
Setting the units of measure
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
distance and temperature:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Brightness
Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness control may not be clearly visible.
Seite 85
Displays Controls
85
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Lamps
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
At a glance
1 Rear fog lamps
2 Front fog lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive
Light Control, High-beam Assistant, Wel‐
come lamps, Daytime running lights
4 Lamps off, daytime running lights
5 Parking lamps, daytime running lights
6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam
Assistant
7 Instrument lighting
Parking lamps/low beams,
headlamp control
General information
Switch position: 0, ,
If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off at these switch settings.
Parking lamps
Switch position : the vehicle lamps light
up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
charged and it would then be impossible to
start the engine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
page 87.
Low beams
Switch position with the ignition switched
on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lamps
When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
position or : the parking and interior
lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Activating/deactivating
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome lights"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Headlamp courtesy delay feature
The low beams stay lit for a short while after
the ignition is switched off, if the lamps are
switched off and the headlamp flasher is
switched on.
Seite 86
Controls Lamps
86
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Setting the duration
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway lighting:"
4. Set the duration.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Automatic headlamp control
Switch position : the low beams are
switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tun‐
nels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams always stay on when the fog
lamps are switched on.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐
ment in determining when the lamps should be
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lamps manually
under these conditions.◀
Daytime running lights
With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐
ning lights light up in position 0, or .
After the ignition is switched off, the parking
lamps light up in position .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
compulsory, so it may not be possible to deac‐
tivate the daytime running lights.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Roadside parking lamps
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Adaptive light control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
the course of the road.
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating
lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
Activating
Switch position with the ignition switched
on.
Seite 87
Lamps Controls
87
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
The turning lamps are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, only the turning lamp
is active.
Self-leveling headlamps
The self-leveling headlamps compensate for
acceleration and braking operations in order
not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve
optimum illumination of the roadway.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
High-beam Assistant
The concept
When the low beams are switched on, this sys‐
tem automatically switches the high beams on
and off. The procedure is controlled by a sen‐
sor on the front of the interior rearview mirror.
The assistant ensures that the high beams are
switched on whenever the traffic situation al‐
lows. The driver can intervene at any time and
switch the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating
1. Turn the light switch to or .
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever,
arrow.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
When the lights are switched on, the
high beams are switched on and off automati‐
cally.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off
when manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐
vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐
ton on the turn signal lever.
Seite 88
Controls Lamps
88
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
System limits
Personal responsibility
The high-beam assistant cannot serve as
a substitute for the driver's personal judgment
of when to use the high beams. Therefore,
manually switch off the high beams in situa‐
tions where this is required to avoid a safety
risk.◀
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on freeways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ At low speeds.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Fog lamps
Front fog lamps
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on.
Press the button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
page 87, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the front
fog lamps.
Instrument lighting
Adjusting
The parking lamps or low beams
must be switched on to adjust
the brightness.
Adjust the brightness using the
thumbwheel.
Interior lamps
General information
The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps
and courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐
cally.
The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐
enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting.
Seite 89
Lamps Controls
89
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
1 Interior lamps
2 Reading lamp
Switching the interior lamps on and
off
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Reading lamps
Press the button.
Reading lamps are located at the front and rear
next to the interior lamps.
When the interior lamps are switched off per‐
manently, the reading lamps cannot be
switched on.
Bang & Olufsen High End Surround
Sound System
Adjusting speaker lighting
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.
The lighting can be individually set.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "B & O"
4. Select the desired lighting setting.
▷ "Off": no lighting.
▷ "Reduced": the speakers in the field of
view are hidden while driving.
▷ "On": the speakers are always illumi‐
nated.
Seite 90
Controls Lamps
90
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Safety
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbags
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐
quate restraint.
Side airbags
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbags
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Seite 91
Safety Controls
91
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on how to ensure the optimal
protective effect of the airbags
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to
keep the danger of injury to your hands or
arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐
jects between an airbag and a person.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not
cover with adhesive labels or coverings,
and do not attach holders such as for navi‐
gation instruments and mobile phones.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries
can occur if the front airbag is triggered.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not rest
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.
▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, cover them or modify
them in any way.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars
and the sides of the headliner.◀
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
and after triggering of the airbags
Do not touch the individual components imme‐
diately after the system has been triggered;
otherwise, there is the danger of burns.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
your service center or a workshop that has the
necessary authorization for handling explo‐
sives.
Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or
undesired triggering of the airbag, either of
which could result in injury.◀
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
When the ignition is switch on, the
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the operational readiness of the entire airbag
system and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
Seite 92
Controls Safety
92
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
When there is a malfunction, have the
airbag system checked immediately
When there is a malfunction, have the airbag
system checked immediately; otherwise, there
is a risk that the system does not function as
expected in the event of an accident despite
corresponding severity of the accident.◀
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
The system determines whether the front pas‐
senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐
sistance of the human body.
The front, knee, and side airbag on the front
passenger side are activated or deactivated
accordingly.
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger
keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise,
the front passenger airbags may not function
properly.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front
passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions under Children on the front passen‐
ger seat.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front passenger airbags may be deacti‐
vated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front passenger airbags are activated and
the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To make sure that the occupied seat cushion
can be evaluated correctly
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically recommended
by the manufacturer of your vehicle.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
Indicator lamp for the front passenger
airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags indicates the operating state of the front
passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐
tivated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child who is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system intended for that
purpose is detected on the
seat or the seat is empty.
The airbags on the front
passenger side are not acti‐
vated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
Seite 93
Safety Controls
93
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Detected child seats
The system generally detects children seated
in a child seat, especially in the child seats that
were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was
manufactured. After installing a child seat,
make sure that the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates
that the child seat has been detected and the
front passenger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front
passenger airbag
The strength with which the driver's and front
passenger airbags are triggered depends on
the position of the driver's and front passenger
seats.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a
corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
Calibrating the front seats
A corresponding message appears on the
Control Display.
1.
Move the respective seat forward all the
way.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. It
moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disap‐
pears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Unobstructed area of movement
Ensure that the area of movement of the
seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury
or damage to objects.◀
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The concept
The system monitors tire pressure in the four
mounted tires. The system warns you if there
is a significant loss of pressure in one or more
tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire
valves measure the tire pressure and tire tem‐
perature.
Hints
Tire damage due to external factors
Sudden tire damage caused by external
influences cannot be indicated in advance.◀
Pay attention to the other information and indi‐
cations under Tire inflation pressure, refer to
page 185, as well when using the system.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐
ble signaling of tire pressure loss is not en‐
sured.
Reset the system again after each correction
of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire
or wheel change.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Status display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the wheels and a text message on the
Control Display.
Seite 94
Controls Safety
94
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning rela‐
tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during
the last reset.
One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires.
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons
for this may be:
▷ The system is being reset.
▷ Malfunction.
Additional information
The status display additionally shows the cur‐
rent tire inflation pressures and tire tempera‐
tures. The values shown are current measure‐
ment values and may vary depending on
driving style or weather conditions.
Carry out reset
Reset the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Carry out the reset with "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The tires are shown in gray and the status is
displayed.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the tire inflation pressures set are
accepted as reference values. The reset is
completed automatically during driving.
After a successfully completed Reset, the
wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
active" is displayed.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you
drive away again, the reset resumes automati‐
cally.
Low tire pressure message
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
The system therefore issues a warning
based on the tire pressures before the last
reset.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
regular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 195, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
When a low inflation pressure is indicated,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
if necessary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, it is possible that a reset was not
Seite 95
Safety Controls
95
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In
that case, carry out a reset.
If an identification is not possible, please
contact the service center.
2. Rectify the flat tire.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility Sys‐
tem, may damage the TPM wheel elec‐
tronics. In this case, have the electronics
checked at the next opportunity and have
them replaced if necessary.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, it is possible that a reset was not
carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In
that case, carry out a reset.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is approx.
50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be smaller or
greater depending on the driving speed, road
conditions, external temperature, cargo load,
etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering
properties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving
can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
could come loose and cause an accident. Do
not continue driving, and contact your service
center.◀
Required inflation pressure check
message
A Check Control message is displayed.
Check the tire inflation pressure and carry out
a reset of the system.
In some cases, a wheel was changed without
having carried out a reset.
System limits
The system does not function properly if a re‐
set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is
reported even though the tire inflation pres‐
sures are correct.
The tire pressure depends on the temperature
of the tire. If the tire temperature rises, e.g.,
due to driving or because of the heat of the
Sun, the tire inflation pressure increases also.
The tire pressure is reduced when the tire
temperature falls again. This behavior may
cause a warning to be issued if temperatures
fall very sharply.
Seite 96
Controls Safety
96
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected.
Display in the following situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
have the service center check it if neces‐
sary.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
your service center.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with
the same radio frequency: after leaving the
area of the disturbance, the system auto‐
matically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
The concept
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing
the rotational speeds of the individual wheels
while moving.
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter
and therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐
sponding wheel change. This is detected and
reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐
Seite 97
Safety Controls
97
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
whether or not the FTM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
The initialization process adopts the set infla‐
tion tire pressures as reference values for the
detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by
confirming the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
inflation pressure.
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
regular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 195, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if necessary.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
vance.◀
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires
cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire
inflation pressure regularly.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive
wheels, high lateral acceleration.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Seite 98
Controls Safety
98
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
If an identification is not possible, please
contact the service center.
2. Rectify the flat tire.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is approx.
50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be smaller or
greater depending on the driving speed, road
conditions, external temperature, cargo load,
etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering
properties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving
can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
could come loose and cause an accident. Do
not continue driving, and contact your service
center.◀
Intelligent Safety
The concept
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
telligent Safety consists of one or more of the
following systems, which can help to avoid an
imminent collision. These systems are active
automatically every time the engine is started
using the Start/Stop button:
▷ Collision warning, refer to page 100.
▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 105.
Note
Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substi‐
tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an
accident is still possible despite all warnings.◀
Seite 99
Safety Controls
99
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after each engine start via the start/
stop button.
Press the button: the systems are
switched off. The LED goes out.
Press the button: the systems are switched off.
The LED lights up.
Settings can be made on the Control Display.
Collision warning
Depending on how the equipment is equipped,
the collision warning system consists of one of
the two systems:
▷ Collision warning with City Braking func‐
tion, refer to page 103;
▷ Collision warning with braking function, re‐
fer to page 100
Collision warning with
braking function
The concept
The system issues a warning if there is immi‐
nent danger of a collision and also includes a
braking function.
If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise
Control with Stop & Go, the collision warning is
controlled via the cruise control radar sensor in
conjunction with a camera.
The collision warning is available even if cruise
control has been deactivated.
When the vehicle is intentionally brought close
to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to
avoid false warnings.
General information
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible danger of collision with vehicles at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time
of these warnings may vary depending on the
current driving situation.
Detection range
It responds to stationary or moving objects
that are within the detection range of the radar
system.
Seite 100
Controls Safety
100
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Radar sensor
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of
the front bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active every time
the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐
ton.
Switching off
The system is only switched off until the next
time the engine is started with the Start/Stop
button.
Press the button.
The LED goes out.
Display
Warning stages
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for example, when
there is the impending danger of a collision or
the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Acute warning with braking function
Warning of the imminent danger of a collision
when the vehicle approaches another object at
a relatively high differential speed.
The acute warning prompts the driver to inter‐
vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is
accompanied by a braking intervention.
The braking intervention may be executed with
maximum braking force and for a brief period
only as necessary.
The intervention can bring the vehicle to a
complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
vated.
Seite 101
Safety Controls
101
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the braking
intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.
No automatic delay occurs.
Adapting your speed and driving style
The warning does not relieve the driver
of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐
ing the steering wheel.
When towing or tow-starting the vehicle,
switch off the collision warning with braking
function to prevent undesired interventions.
Display in the instrument cluster
The collision warning can be issued in the in‐
strument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and
acoustically.
Warning stages
Symbol Measure
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐
ing.
Increase distance.
The vehicle flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
ing.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Adapting your speed and driving style
The display does not relieve the driver of
the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
System limits
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐
ger of an accident occurring.◀
Detection range
The system's detection capabilities are limited.
This may result in the warning not being is‐
sued or being issued late.
For example, the following situations may not
be detected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷ Pedestrians.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for example, DSC
OFF.
▷ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen‐
sor is dirty or obscured.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
▷ If there is constant dimming because of
oncoming light, for example, from the sun
low in the sky.
Seite 102
Controls Safety
102
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Prewarning sensitivity
Depending on the set prewarning time, this
may result in increased false warnings.
Collision warning with City
Braking function
The concept
The system can help to prevent accidents. If
an accident cannot be prevented, the system
helps to reduce the collision speed.
The system issues a warning if there is immi‐
nent danger of a collision and if so brakes inde‐
pendently.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
The system is controlled via a camera in the
base of the mirror.
The collision warning is available even if cruise
control has been deactivated.
When the vehicle is intentionally brought close
to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to
avoid false warnings.
General information
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
danger of collision with vehicles at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of these
warnings may vary depending on the current
driving situation.
Up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h a braking inter‐
vention occurs when appropriate.
Detection range
Vehicles are observed when they are traveling
in the same direction of movement if they are
located within the detection range of the sys‐
tem.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active every time
the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐
ton.
Switching off
The system is only switched off until the next
time the engine is started with the Start/Stop
button.
Press the button.
Seite 103
Safety Controls
103
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
The LED goes out.
Warning with braking function
Adapting your speed and driving style
The warning does not relieve the driver
of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
Display
If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
Symbol Measure
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐
ing.
Increase braking and distance.
The vehicle flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
ing.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself to in‐
tervene. During the warning, the maximum
braking force is used, even with light pressure
on the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk
of collision, the system can assist with a slight
braking intervention. The intervention can
bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a
complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
vated.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐
ing the steering wheel.
When towing or tow-starting the vehicle,
switch off the collision warning with braking
function to prevent undesired interventions.
System limits
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐
ger of an accident occurring.◀
Detection range
The system's detection capabilities are limited.
This may result in the warning not being is‐
sued or being issued late.
For example, the following situations may not
be detected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷ Pedestrians.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for example, DSC
OFF.
▷ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen‐
sor is dirty or obscured.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
Seite 104
Controls Safety
104
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
▷ If there is constant dimming because of
oncoming light, for example, from the sun
low in the sky.
Prewarning sensitivity
Depending on the set prewarning time, this
may result in increased false warnings.
Pedestrian warning
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the
function warns of an imminent collision with
pedestrians during daytime or nighttime.
The function is subdivided into the following
systems:
▷ During daytime: Pedestrian warning with
city braking function, refer to page 105
▷ At night: Night Vision with pedestrian de‐
tection, refer to page 107
Pedestrian warning with city
braking function
The concept
The system can help to prevent accidents with
pedestrians.
The system issues a warning in the city driving
speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐
lision with pedestrians and includes a braking
function.
The system is controlled via the camera in the
base of the interior mirror.
General information
The system issues a warning with brightness
staring at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx.
35 mph/60 km/h regarding a possible risk of
collision with pedestrians and assists with a
brake intervention shortly before a collision.
It responds to persons that are within the de‐
tection range of the system.
Detection range
The warning area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas.
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Seite 105
Safety Controls
105
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active every time
the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐
ton.
Switching off
Press the button: the systems are
switched off. The LED goes out.
Press the button: the systems are switched off.
The LED lights up.
Warning with braking function
Adapting your speed and driving style
The warning does not relieve the driver
of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or making an
evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself to in‐
tervene. During the warning, the maximum
braking force is used, even with light pressure
on the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk
of collision, the system can assist with a slight
braking intervention. The intervention can
bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a
complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
vated.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐
ing the steering wheel.
When towing or tow-starting the vehicle,
switch off the pedestrian warning to prevent
undesired interventions.
System limits
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐
ger of an accident occurring.◀
Detection range
The detection capability of the camera is lim‐
ited.
This may result in the warning not being is‐
sued or being issued late.
For example, the following situations may not
be detected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
Seite 106
Controls Safety
106
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
▷ Pedestrians below a body size of approx.
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the camera view field or the front wind‐
shield are dirty or covered.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop knob.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
Night Vision with Pedestrian
and Animal Detection
The concept
Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐
tion is a night vision system.
An infrared camera records the area in front of
the vehicle and issues a warning if it detects
pedestrians and animals on the street. Warm
objects that are similar in shape to human be‐
ings or animals are detected by the system. If
necessary, the heat image can be displayed on
the Control Display.
Heat image
The image shows the heat radiated by objects
in the field of view of the camera.
Warm objects have a light appearance and
cold objects, a dark appearance.
The ability to detect an object depends on the
temperature difference between the object
and the background and on the level of heat
radiation emitted by the object. Objects that
are similar in temperature to the environment
or that radiate very little heat are difficult to de‐
tect.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambi‐
ent light, the image is only displayed when the
low beams are switched on.
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for
a fraction of a second.
Pedestrian and animal detection
Object detection and warning only functions in
darkness.
Warm objects that are similar in shape to hu‐
man beings are detected by the system.
Seite 107
Safety Controls
107
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
In addition, the system also detects animals
above a certain minimum size, e.g., deer.
With heat image activated on the Control Dis‐
play:
People detected by the system are displayed
with a slight yellow hue.
Animals detected by the system are displayed
in a darker yellow.
Under good ambient conditions, the object de‐
tection operates within the following distance
ranges:
▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx.
330 ft/100 m
▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx.
490 ft/150 m
▷ Detection of medium animals: up to ap‐
prox. 230 ft/70 m
Environmental influences can limit the availa‐
bility of object detection.
If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is
located in a residential area, the animal detec‐
tion is temporarily switched off.
Notes
Personal responsibility
Night Vision cannot replace the driver's
personal judgment of the visibility conditions
and the traffic situation. The view ahead and
the actual visibility conditions must always be
the basis on which the vehicle speed is ad‐
justed; otherwise, there is a risk to road
safety.◀
At a glance
Buttons in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Switch on/switch off heat image
Camera
The camera is automatically heated when the
external temperatures are low.
The camera is automatically cleaned together
with the headlamps.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Every time the engine is started using the
Start/Stop button, the system is automatically
active at dark.
Switching off
The system is only switched off until the next
time the engine is started with the Start/Stop
button.
Seite 108
Controls Safety
108
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Press the button.
The LED goes out.
Switching on heat image additionally
The heat image from the Night Vision camera
can also be displayed on the Control Display.
This function has no effect on object detec‐
tion.
Press the button.
The image from the camera is displayed on the
Control Display.
Adjustments via the iDrive
With heat image switched on:
1.
Press the controller.
2. Select brightness or contrast.
▷ Select the symbol.
▷ Select the symbol.
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Display
Warning of people or animals in
danger
If a collision with a person or an animal de‐
tected in this way is imminent, a warning sym‐
bol appears on the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
Although both the shape and the heat radiation
are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled
out.
Warning area in front of the vehicle
The warning area for the pedestrian warning
consists of two parts:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
In the animal warning, no distinction is made
between the central or expanded area.
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in
the direction of the steering angle and changes
with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed
increases, the area becomes longer and wider,
for example.
Prewarning
The yellow symbol is displayed when a
person is detected in the central area,
arrow 1, immediately in front of the ve‐
hicle.
The yellow symbol is displayed when a person
in the extended area, arrow 2, is moving from
the right or left towards the central area.
The displayed symbol can vary with the people
detected.
Intervene actively by braking or making an eva‐
sive maneuver.
When animals are detected, an animal
symbol is displayed. The symbol also
shows the side of the road on which
the animal was detected. Intervene actively by
braking or making an evasive maneuver.
Seite 109
Safety Controls
109
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Acute warning
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or
making an evasive maneuver.
With animals no acute warning occurs.
Display in the Head-up Display
The warning is displayed simultane‐
ously in the Head-up Display and on
the instrument cluster. The displayed
symbol can vary with the people detected.
When animals are detected, an animal symbol
is displayed.
System limits
Basic limits
System operation is limited in situations such
as the following:
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
▷ When the camera is dirty or the protective
glass is damaged.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ At very high external temperatures.
Limits of pedestrian and animal
detection
In some situations, it may occur that pedes‐
trians are detected as animals or animals as
pedestrians.
Small animals are not detected by the object
detection function, even if they are clearly visi‐
ble in the image.
Limited detection:
▷ People or animals who are fully or partially
covered, especially when their heads are
covered.
▷ People who are not in an upright position,
e.g., lying down.
▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,
recumbent bicycles).
▷ After physical damage to the system, e.g.,
after an accident.
Lane departure warning
The concept
Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane
markings is about to leave the lane. Depending
on the country-specific version of the vehicle,
the speed is between 35 mph/55 km/h and
45 mph/70 km/h. If the system is switched on
below this speed, a message appears in the in‐
strument cluster.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
the event of warnings. The time of the warning
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
uation.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Notes
Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the
course of the road and the traffic situation.
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐
ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐
cle.◀
Seite 110
Controls Safety
110
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Lane departure warning
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Lines: system is activated.
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking was de‐
tected and warnings can be issued.
Display in the instrument display
▷ Symbol red: system is activated.
▷ Symbol green: at least one lane
marking was detected and warn‐
ings can be issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning ends:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In the event of worn, poorly visible, merg‐
ing, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
Seite 111
Safety Controls
111
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
Active Blind Spot Detection
The concept
Two radar sensors below the rear bumper
monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle
at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐
cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights
up dimly.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐
uations described above.
The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror
flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.
Notes
Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substi‐
tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an
accident is still possible despite all warnings.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Active Blind Spot Detection
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located under the rear
bumper.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The system can issue warnings at speeds
above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Seite 112
Controls Safety
112
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Display
Information stage
The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi‐
cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot
or approaching from behind.
Warning
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes
brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
critical zone.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Brake force display
The concept
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lamps light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lamps light up in addition.
Active Protection
General information
The Active Protection safety package consists
of systems that are independent of each other:
▷ Attentiveness assistant.
▷ PreCrash
▷ PostCrash
Seite 113
Safety Controls
113
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Attentiveness assistant
The concept
The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐
ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐
notonous journeys, for example, on highways.
In this situation, it is recommended that the
driver take a break.
Note
Personal responsibility
The system cannot act as a substitute for
the personal assessment of one's physical
state and may not detect an increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue or may not detect it cor‐
rectly. Therefore, make sure that the driver is
rested and alert; otherwise, risks may be de‐
tected too late and an accident be caused as a
result.◀
Function
The system is activated each time the engine
is started and cannot be switched off.
After travel has begun, the system is trained
about the driver, so that increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue can be detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, for example, steer‐
ing behavior.
▷ Driving conditions, for example, length of
trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break.
Break recommendation
If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or
fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control
Display with the recommendation to take a
break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following
situations, for instance, and will either output
an incorrect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering
quickly.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
PreCrash
The concept
With this system critical driving situations that
might result in an accident can be detected
above a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. In
these situations, preventative protection
measures are automatically undertaken to
minimize the risk in the event of an accident as
much as possible.
Critical driving situations may include:
▷ Full brake applications.
If the vehicle includes the collision warning or
collision warning with braking feature, impend‐
ing collisions with vehicles driving ahead or
stopped in front of you can also be detected
within the system's range.
Seite 114
Controls Safety
114
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Note
Personal responsibility
The system cannot possibly serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
the traffic situation. The system may not al‐
ways detect critical situations reliably and in a
timely manner. Adapt speed to traffic situation
and drive alertly; otherwise, a risk to safety may
result.◀
Function
After the safety belt is buckled, the front belts
are automatically pretensioned once after the
vehicle is driven is away.
In critical driving situations, the following indi‐
vidual functions become active as needed:
▷ The front belts are automatically preten‐
sioned.
▷ Automatic closing of the windows.
▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof.
▷ For vehicles equipped with Comfort Seats:
automatic positioning of the backrest for
the front passenger seat.
After a critical driving situation without an acci‐
dent, the front belts are loosened again. All
other systems can be restored to the desired
setting.
If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt
using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
belt before continuing on your trip.
PostCrash
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the car to a halt automatically without in‐
tervention by the driver in certain situations.
This can reduce the risk of a further collision
and the consequences thereof.
Depressing the brake pedal can cause the ve‐
hicle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic
braking. Depressing the accelerator pedal also
interrupts automatic braking.
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically. Secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
Seite 115
Safety Controls
115
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle remains steerable even during full
brake applications, thus increasing active
safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost. This then reduces braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during full braking. This
system utilizes all of the benefits provided by
ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
When equipped with Driving Assistant Plus or
with Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go
function, ACC is supported by the braking in‐
tervention if there is a possible risk of collision.
To do this, the braking force is automatically
increased if the braking pressure is insufficient
when the brakes are applied.
Adaptive brake assistant
In combination with the Active Cruise Control,
this system ensures that the brakes respond
even more rapidly when braking in critical sit‐
uations.
Drive-off assistant
This system supports driving away on gradi‐
ents. The parking brake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive away
without delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
Driving off without delay
After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐
ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant
will not hold the vehicle in place for more than
approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin
rolling back.◀
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
The concept
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving
wheels when driving away and accelerating.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Sub‐
ject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the
vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine
speed and by applying brakes at individual
wheels.
Seite 116
Controls Driving stability control systems
116
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Adjust your driving style to the situation
An appropriate driving style is always the
responsibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
with DSC.
Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
margin by driving in a risky manner.◀
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
in bends.
Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active
Steering system are only performed by the
rear axle steering.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed.
The DSC system is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
The concept
The DTC system is a version of the DSC in
which forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum forward mo‐
mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐
lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐
ited.
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
ate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When rocking the vehicle or driving off in
deep snow or on loose surfaces.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
provides maximum traction on loose ground.
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
Activating DTC
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
tor lamp go out.
Seite 117
Driving stability control systems Controls
117
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Indicator/warning lamps
When DTC is activated, TRACTION is dis‐
played in the tachometer.
The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐
namic Traction Control is activated.
xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐
tributes the drive forces to the front and rear
axles as demanded by the driving situation and
road surface.
HDC Hill Descent Control
The concept
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐
matically controls vehicle speed on steep
downhill gradients. Without applying the
brakes, the vehicle moves at slightly more than
walking speed.
Hill Descent Control can be activated at
speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When
driving downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed
to approx. walking speed and then keeps its
speed constant.
As long as there is active braking, the system
is on standby. The system does not brake the
vehicle during this time.
Use HDC in low gears or in transmission posi‐
tion D or R only.
Increasing or decreasing vehicle
speed
Specify desired speed in the range from ap‐
prox. 4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/h
using the rocker switch of the cruise control on
the steering wheel. Vehicle speed can be
changed by lightly accelerating.
▷ Press up the rocker switch to the point of
resistance: the speed increases gradually.
▷ Press up the rocker switch past the point
of resistance: the speed increases while
the rocker switch is pressed.
▷ Press down the rocker switch to the point
of resistance: the speed decreases gradu‐
ally.
▷ Press down the rocker switch past the
point of resistance: when driving forward,
the speed decreases to approx.
6 mph/10 km/h; when reversing, the speed
decreases to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h.
Activating HDC
Press the button; the LED above the but‐
ton lights up.
Deactivating HDC
Press the button again and the LED goes
out. HDC is automatically deactivated
above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.
Seite 118
Controls Driving stability control systems
118
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Display in the instrument cluster
The selected speed is displayed
in the speedometer.
▷ Green: the system is actively
braking the vehicle.
▷ Orange: the system is on
standby.
Malfunction
A message is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevated
brake temperatures.
Adaptive Drive
The concept
Adaptive Drive includes the following systems:
▷ Dynamic Drive, refer to page 119.
▷ Dynamic Damping Control, refer to
page 119.
The system increases driving stability and driv‐
ing comfort.
Dynamic Drive
The concept
Dynamic Drive reduces the lateral inclination of
the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in
curves or during quick evasive maneuvers.
Driving stability and driving comfort are in‐
creased under all driving conditions. The sys‐
tem utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front
and rear axles that react immediately to all driv‐
ing situations.
Programs
The system offers two different programs.
The programs can be selected via the Driving
Dynamics Control, refer to page 120.
SPORT
Sporty tuning for greater driving agility.
COMFORT
Comfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort.
Dynamic Damping Control
The concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
The system enhances driving dynamics and
comfort as required for the road surface and
driving style.
Programs
The system offers several different programs.
The programs can be selected via the Driving
Dynamics Control, refer to page 120.
SPORT/SPORT+
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility.
COMFORT/ECO PRO
Balanced tuning between the COMFORT+ and
SPORT/SPORT+ programs.
COMFORT+
Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorb‐
ers for optimal traveling comfort.
Integral Active Steering
The concept
Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac‐
tive Steering and rear axle steering.
Active Steering varies the steering angle of the
wheels in relation to the steering wheel move‐
ment as a function of the speed.
Seite 119
Driving stability control systems Controls
119
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
At speeds up to approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, e.g.,
in curves, the steering angle is increased, i.e.,
steering becomes more direct.
The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu‐
verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in
a direction opposite to the front wheels.
At higher speeds, the steering angle is increas‐
ingly reduced.
The rear wheels are turned to the same angle
as the front wheels.
In critical situations, Integral Active Steering
can specifically steer the front and rear wheels
to stabilize the vehicle before the driver inter‐
venes, e.g., when braking where road condi‐
tions differ on the left and right sides of the ve‐
hicle.
Initializing
In rare cases, it may become necessary to initi‐
alize the Integral Active Steering.
The warning lamp lights up. A Check
Control message is displayed.
1.
With the engine running, turn the steering
wheel all the way to the left and right sev‐
eral times in a uniform manner until the
warning lamp disappears.
2. Have the system checked if the warning
lamp does not go out after moving the
steering wheel approx. 6 times or if the
steering wheel is at an angle.
Using snow chains
Note
When snow chains are in use, refer to
page 196, rear wheel steering is deactivated.
Programs
The system offers several different programs.
The programs can be selected via the Driving
Dynamics Control, refer to page 120.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the Integral Ac‐
tive Steering for greater driving agility.
COMFORT
Balanced tuning of the Integral Active Steering
for optimal traveling comfort.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, the steering
wheel must be turned further, while the vehicle
responds more sensitively to steering wheel
movements in the higher speed range.
The stability-enhancing intervention may be
deactivated.
Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
Have the system checked.
Driving Dynamics Control
The concept
The Driving Dynamics Control can be used to
adjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle. For
this purpose various programs are available for
selection that are activated via the two buttons
of the Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC
OFF-button.
Operating the programs
Press the button Program
DSC OFF
TRACTION
SPORT+
SPORT
COMFORT
COMFORT+
ECO PRO
Seite 120
Controls Driving stability control systems
120
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Automatic program change
The system may automatically switch to COM‐
FORT in the following situations:
▷ Failure of Integral Active Steering.
▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
DSC OFF
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active
Steering system are only performed by the
rear axle steering.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed in
the tachometer.
The DSC system is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When DSC OFF is activated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the tachometer.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC OFF
is activated.
TRACTION
Maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. Driv‐
ing stability is limited during acceleration and
when driving in bends.
Activating TRACTION
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the tach‐
ometer.
The DSC indicator lamp in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up.
Deactivating TRACTION
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC indicator
lamp go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When TRACTION is activated, TRACTION is
displayed in the tachometer.
The indicator lamp lights up: TRAC‐
TION is activated.
SPORT+
Sporty driving with optimized chassis and
adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐
bilization.
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
The driver handles several of the stabilization
tasks.
Activating SPORT+
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT+ appears in the tachometer
and the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster.
Automatic program change
When switching on the adjustable speed limit
or activating cruise control, the program auto‐
matically switches to SPORT mode.
Indicator/warning lamps
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Seite 121
Driving stability control systems Controls
121
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up:
Dynamic Traction Control is activated.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension
and engine control for greater driving agility
with maximum driving stabilization.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
The configuration is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Activating SPORT
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT appears in the tachometer.
Configuring SPORT
When the display is activated on the Control
Display, refer to page 123, the SPORT driving
mode can be set.
After the SPORT driving mode is activated, se‐
lect "Configure SPORT" on the displayed
panel and configure the program.
SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐
vated:
1.
"Settings"
2. "SPORT mode" or: "Driving mode"
3. Configure driving mode.
This configuration is retrieved when the
SPORT driving mode is activated.
COMFORT
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving
stabilization.
Activating COMFORT
Press the button repeatedly until the
program display in the tachometer
goes out.
In certain situations, the system automatically
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
program change, refer to page 121.
COMFORT+
Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorb‐
ers and adapted engine control for optimal
traveling comfort with maximum driving stabili‐
zation.
Activating COMFORT+
Press the button repeatedly until
COMFORT+ appears in the tachome‐
ter.
ECO PRO
ECO PRO, refer to page 174, provides consis‐
tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for
maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐
zation.
Comfort functions and the engine controller
are adjusted.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
1.
Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
Make the desired settings.
Configure driving mode
Settings can be made for the following driving
modes in Driving mode:
▷ SPORT mode, refer to page 122.
▷ ECO PRO mode, refer to page 174.
Seite 122
Controls Driving stability control systems
122
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Displays in the instrument cluster
Selected program
The selected program is dis‐
played in the tachometer.
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a
list of the selectable programs.
Display on the Control Display
Program changes can be displayed briefly on
the Control Display.
To do so, make the following settings:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Control display"
"Driving mode"
3. "Driving mode info"
Seite 123
Driving stability control systems Controls
123
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go function, ACC
The concept
This system can be used to select a desired
speed that the vehicle will maintain automati‐
cally on clear roads.
To the extent possible, the system automati‐
cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle
ahead of you.
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the
vehicle ahead of you can be varied.
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐
tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes
lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead
begins moving faster.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the
system is able to detect this within the given
system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your
drives away again from a halt, your vehicle is
able to accelerate if operated accordingly.
Even if some time passes before the vehicle
drives away again, the BMW can still be accel‐
erated automatically and simply.
As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to
the desired speed.
The speed is also maintained on downhill gra‐
dients, but may not be maintained on uphill
slopes if engine power is insufficient.
General information
When ECO PRO is activated, cruise control is
also set to a driving style that saves on fuel
consumption.
Notes
Personal responsibility
The system does not relieve the driver of
the responsibility to adapt his or her speed,
distance and driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Drive attentively, and react to the current
traffic events. Intervene actively when neces‐
sary, e.g., by braking, steering or making an
evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is danger
of an accident.◀
At a glance
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press the
button
Function
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐
ing, refer to page 125
Store/maintain speed, refer to
page 126
Resume speed, refer to
page 127
Reduce distance, refer to
page 127
Increase distance, refer to
page 127
Adjust distance, refer to
page 127
Seite 124
Controls Driving comfort
124
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Press the
button
Function
Rocker switch:
Change/maintain speed, refer
to page 126
Congestion Assistant ON/OFF,
Pause, refer to page 130
The arrangement of the buttons varies accord‐
ing to the how the vehicle is equipped or coun‐
try-specific variants.
Radar sensor
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the
vehicle.
A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de‐
tection of vehicles.
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐
move layers of snow and ice carefully.
▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar
sensor.
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
light up and the marking in the speedometer is
set to the current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or inter‐
rupted, actively intervene by braking, steering
and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐
curring.◀
If switching off the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
Seite 125
Driving comfort Controls
125
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
and distance are deleted.
Interrupting
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
If interrupting the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the brakes are applied.
▷ When transmission position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is
activated or DSC is deactivated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are
opened when the vehicle is standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for
an extended period, e.g., on a road with
very little traffic without road edge line
markings.
▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐
rupted, for example, by dirt or heavy fog.
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the button.
Or:
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
the instrument cluster, refer to page 128.
When cruise control is maintained or stored,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
Changing, maintaining, and storing
the speed
The rocker switch can be pressed while the
system is interrupted to maintain and store the
current speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control
is switched on, if necessary.
Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐
curring.◀
Speed differences
Large differences in speed relative to
other vehicles cannot be compensated by the
system for example in the following situations:
▷ When catching up rapidly with a truck.
▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves
into the wrong lane.
▷ When stationary objects are approached at
speed.◀
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
Seite 126
Controls Driving comfort
126
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Distance
Selecting a distance
Adjust the distance according to the traf‐
fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is
the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain
the prescribed safety distance.◀
Reduce distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
The selected distance, refer to page 128, is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Increase distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
The selected distance, refer to page 128, is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Adjust distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Calling up the desired speed and
distance
While driving
Press the button with the system
switched on.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
While standing
Before leaving the vehicle, secure it
against rolling
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
mission and apply the parking brake. Other‐
wise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
The system brought the vehicle to a complete
standstill.
▷ Green marking in the speedometer:
Your vehicle accelerates automatically as
soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐
dar sensor moves off.
▷ Marking in the speedometer turns orange:
no automatic driving away.
To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐
matically, press the accelerator briefly or
press the RES or SET button.
Rolling bars in the distance display indicate
that the vehicle in the radar sensor detection
range has moved off.
Your vehicle was braked to a halt by pressing
on the brake pedal and it is standing behind
another vehicle:
1. Press the button to call up a stored
desired speed.
2. Release the brake pedal.
Seite 127
Driving comfort Controls
127
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press
the RES button or the rocker switch when
the vehicle ahead of you drives away.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed
▷ The marking lights up green:
the system is active.
▷ The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
With instrument display: the symbol is
displayed in the speedometer similarly
to the mark for the desired speed.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐
tem requirements for operation are currently
not met.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
The selected distance to the vehicle driving
ahead of you is shown.
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance display
Distance 4
This value is set after the system is
switched on.
The system has been interrupted or
distance control is deactivated be‐
cause the accelerator is being
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Distance control is deactivated be‐
cause the accelerator is being
pressed; a vehicle was detected.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven
away.
Indicator/warning lamps
Personal responsibility
The indicator and warning lamps do not
relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt
his or her desired driving speed and style to
the traffic conditions.◀
The vehicle symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
The vehicle symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for
operating the system.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively assume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator.
The vehicle symbol flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive maneuver.
Displays in the Head-up Display
The information from Active Cruise Control
can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.
Seite 128
Controls Driving comfort
128
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Adjusting the Head-up Display, refer to
page 148.
System limits
Speed range
Best results are achieved when using the sys‐
tem on well-developed roads and highways.
The desired speed can be selected between
20 mph/30 km/h to 110 mph/180 km/h.
The system can also be activated when sta‐
tionary.
Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐
uation when using the system.
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not
be detected.
Limited detection capacity
Because of the limits to the detection ca‐
pacity of the camera and the sensor, you
should be alert at all times so that you can in‐
tervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there
is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate for:
▷ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road
users.
▷ Red traffic lights.
▷ Cross traffic.
▷ Oncoming traffic.
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
Swerving vehicles
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐
hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,
the system requests that the driver intervene
by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐
vers, if necessary. You must react yourself;
otherwise, there is the danger of an accident
occurring.◀
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although
curves cannot be anticipated in advance.
Seite 129
Driving comfort Controls
129
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate
speed.
In tight curves, situations may result due to the
restricted detection range of the system in
which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not
be detected at all, or not until after a consider‐
able delay.
When approaching a curve, the system may
react briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due
to the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of
the vehicle by the system can be compensated
for by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator
pedal is released, the system becomes active
again and independently controls the speed.
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive
away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or
behind bumps in the road.
Radar sensor
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ OAYARS3-A
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar
sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be
caused by damage incurred during parking, for
example.
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.
The function for detecting and responding
when approaching stationary vehicles may be
limited in the following situation:
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A
Check Control message is displayed.
Congestion Assistant
The concept
In congestion situations, the system controls
the speed, steers independently and keeps the
vehicle in the lane.
To the extent possible, the system automati‐
cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle
ahead of you. The distance that the vehicle
maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be
varied. For safety reasons, it depends on the
speed. To maintain a certain distance, the sys‐
tem automatically decelerates, applies the
brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi‐
cle ahead begins moving faster.
When lane markings are detected, the system
keeps the vehicle in the lane. For this purpose,
the system steers independently as needed,
for example, during cornering.
Seite 130
Controls Driving comfort
130
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
General information
The congestion assistant determines speed
and distance from the vehicle in front via a ra‐
dar sensor and the position of the lane marking
via a camera.
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
The system is deactivated as soon as contact
with the steering wheel is no longer detected.
In order to be able to use the Congestion As‐
sistant, place your hands around the steering
wheel.
When driving with gloves or with protective
covers, contact with the steering wheel cannot
be detected by the sensors. The system in this
case cannot be used.
Notes
Personal responsibility
The system does not relieve the driver of
the responsibility to adapt his or her speed,
distance and driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Drive attentively, and react to the current
traffic events. Intervene actively when neces‐
sary, e.g., by braking, steering or making an
evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is danger
of an accident.◀
Functional requirements
▷ Drive on approved road type. The data on
this are stored in the navigation system.
▷ Driving on the limited access highway or
divided lane roads.
▷ Sufficient lane width.
▷ Lane marking is detected.
▷ Vehicle driving ahead is detected.
▷ Speed below 25 mph/40 km/h.
▷ Both hands on the steering wheel rim.
At a glance
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press the
button
Function
Congestion Assistant ON/OFF,
Pause, refer to page 132.
Rocker switch:
Store, change/maintain speed,
refer to page 126.
Maintain, store speed, refer to
page 126.
Resume speed, refer to
page 127.
Adjust distance, refer to
page 127.
Radar sensor
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the
vehicle.
A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de‐
tection of vehicles.
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐
move layers of snow and ice carefully.
▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar
sensor.
Seite 131
Driving comfort Controls
131
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off and pausing
Switching on
Press the button.
▷ Prepare system: press once.
▷ Activate system:
The system is automatically activated be‐
low 25 mph/40 km/h.
If the ACC is not activated: press wiper.
With ACC activated: system is ready.
If ACC is not activated: indicator lamp
in the instrument cluster comes on.
If ACC is not activated: indicator lamp
in the instrument cluster comes on.
Congestion Assistant can be used.
With Congestion Assistant switched on, the
Pedestrian Warning system is active.
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or inter‐
rupted, actively intervene by braking, steering
and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐
curring.◀
Press the button.
The indicator goes out. Stored desired speed
and distance are still kept by the ACC.
The system no longer steers independently.
Interrupting
When active, press the button.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ At a speed above 25 mph/40 km/h.
▷ With only one detected lane marking.
▷ When you leave the limited access high‐
way.
▷ When you leave the divided lane road.
▷ When the steering wheel is released.
▷ When steering intervention is active.
▷ When you leave your own lane.
▷ With incorrect vehicle ahead.
▷ When the turn signal is on.
Red flashing and signal tone:
Congestion Assistant is interrupted.
The system no longer steers independ‐
ently. ACC exercises control.
If the system conditions are met, the system
reactivates automatically.
Distance
Selecting a distance
Adjust the distance according to the traf‐
fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is
the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain
the prescribed safety distance.◀
Seite 132
Controls Driving comfort
132
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Adjust distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
The selected distance to the vehicle driving
ahead of you is shown.
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set after the system is
switched on.
Selecting a distance
Adjust the distance according to the traf‐
fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is
the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain
the prescribed safety distance.◀
Displays in the instrument cluster
Symbol Description
Congestion Assistant and Distance
Control on standby.
Congestion Assistant on standby.
Distance control controls within the
set distance.
Congestion Assistant activated.
The system controls the speed and
assists with maintaining the lane.
Symbol Description
Rolling bars: at least one functional
requirement is no longer satisfied.
The system soon deactivates the
automatic steering. ACC on
standby.
Red flashing and signal tone: con‐
gestion Assistant is interrupted.
The system does not steer inde‐
pendently. ACC exercises control.
System limits
When driving within narrow driving lanes, e.g.,
in construction zones or rescue lanes, the sys‐
tem cannot be activated or meaningfully used.
Limited detection capacity
Because of the limits to the detection ca‐
pacity of the camera and the sensor, you
should be alert at all times so that you can in‐
tervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there
is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Complying with country-specific laws
When the Congestion Assistant is used,
observe specific national laws.◀
Cruise control
The concept
The system is functional at speeds beginning
at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
It maintains the speed that was set using the
control elements on the steering wheel.
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking action is insufficient.
Unfavorable conditions
Do not use the system if unfavorable
conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐
stant speed, for instance:
▷ On curvy roads.
Seite 133
Driving comfort Controls
133
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐
cle and cause an accident.◀
General information
When ECO PRO is activated, cruise control is
also set to a driving style that saves on fuel
consumption.
Controls
At a glance
Press the
button
Function
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐
ing, refer to page 134
Store/maintain speed, refer to
page 134
Resume speed, refer to
page 135
Rocker switch:
Change/maintain speed, refer
to page 135
The arrangement of the buttons varies accord‐
ing to the how the vehicle is equipped or coun‐
try-specific variants.
Switching on
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
The cruise control can be used.
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or inter‐
rupted, actively intervene by braking and, if
necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting
When active, press the button.
The system is automatically interrupted if:
▷ The brakes are applied.
▷ The transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated.
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ HDC is activated.
Maintaining/storing the current speed
Press the button.
Or:
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
Seite 134
Controls Driving comfort
134
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
the speedometer, refer to page 135.
When cruise control is maintained or stored,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
Changing/maintaining speed
The rocker switch can be pressed while the
system is interrupted in order to maintain and
store the current speed.
Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐
curring.◀
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Max. adjustable speed: 140 mph/230 km/h.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
ance point and holding it there accelerates
or decelerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator. After the
rocker switch is released, the vehicle main‐
tains its final speed. Pressing the switch
beyond the resistance point causes the ve‐
hicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Resuming the desired speed
Press the button.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator lamp
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
tem is switched on.
Desired speed
▷ The marking lights up green:
the system is active.
▷ The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
With instrument display: the symbol is
displayed in the speedometer similarly
to the mark for the desired speed.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐
tem requirements for operation are currently
not met.
Seite 135
Driving comfort Controls
135
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
PDC Park Distance Control
The concept
PDC supports you when parking. Objects that
you are approaching slowly in front of or be‐
hind your vehicle are indicated by:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
General information
Measurements are made by ultrasound sen‐
sors in the bumpers.
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐
ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.
Notes
Check the traffic situation as well
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐
tion. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
dent could result from road users or objects
located outside of the PDC detection range.
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehi‐
cle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's
signal tone.◀
Avoid driving quickly with PDC
Avoid approaching an object quickly.
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet
active.
For technical reasons, the system may other‐
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
PDC Park Distance Control
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control,
the rearview camera, refer to page 138, can be
switched on.
Switching on the rearview camera via
the iDrive
With PDC activated or Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed. The
setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Seite 136
Controls Driving comfort
136
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Display
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone is sounded that indicates the position of
the object. For example, if an object is de‐
tected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal
tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object be‐
comes, the shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
If objects are located both in front of and be‐
hind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig‐
nal is sounded.
The intermittent tone is interrupted after ap‐
prox. 3 seconds:
▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that
is detected by only one of the corner sen‐
sors.
▷ If moving parallel to a wall.
The signal tone is switched off:
▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
▷ When transmission position P is engaged.
Volume
The volume of the PDC signal can be adjusted,
refer to user's manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display. Objects that
are farther away are displayed on the Control
Display before a signal tone sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors red, green and yellow.
If the rearview camera image was selected last,
it again appears on the display. To switch to
PDC:
1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
2. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
System limits
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physi‐
cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g.:
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With low objects.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may
not be detected.
False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
rages.
▷ In heavy exhaust.
Seite 137
Driving comfort Controls
137
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
area on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
To ensure full operability:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Surround View
The concept
Surround View comprises various camera as‐
sistance systems that help the driver when
parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits
and intersections.
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 138
▷ Side View, refer to page 142.
▷ Top View, refer to page 140.
Backup camera
The concept
The backup camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
Hints
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
dent could result from road users or objects lo‐
cated outside the picture area of the backup
camera.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Rearview camera
Camera
The camera lens is located under the BMW
emblem of the trunk lid. The image quality may
be impaired by dirt. The camera calibrates it‐
self regularly after the system has been
switched off. This is why the emblem on the
tailgate remains open after the system has
been deactivated and while driving. The em‐
blem closes automatically as soon as calibra‐
tion is complete.
Clean the lens, refer to page 218.
Seite 138
Controls Driving comfort
138
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The backup camera image is displayed if the
system was switched on via the iDrive.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
Switching on the rearview camera via
the iDrive
With PDC activated or Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed. The
setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.
Activating the assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Pathway and turning circle lines are dis‐
played.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Pathway lines
▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐
age when in transmission position R.
▷ Help you to estimate the space required
when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
▷ Are dependent on the current steering an‐
gle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
Turning circle lines
▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐
age.
▷ Show the course of the smallest possible
turning circle on a level road.
▷ Only one turning circle line is displayed
when the steering wheel is turned.
Seite 139
Driving comfort Controls
139
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Obstacle marking
General information
▷ Spatially-shaped markings can be shown
in the rearview camera image.
Their colored steps match the markings of the
PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance
to the object shown.
Parking using pathway and turning
circle lines
1.
Position the vehicle so that the turning cir‐
cle lines lead to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
High, protruding objects such as ledges may
not be detected by the rearview camera.
Top View
The concept
Top View assists you in parking and maneu‐
vering. The area around the doors and the road
area around the vehicle are shown on the Con‐
trol Display for this purpose.
Seite 140
Controls Driving comfort
140
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
General information
The image is captured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the
backup camera.
The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and
rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the
exterior mirrors are detected early.
Notes
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
dent could result from road users or objects lo‐
cated outside the picture area of the
cameras.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Top View
Cameras
The lenses of the Top View cameras are lo‐
cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐
ings. The image quality may be impaired by
dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 218.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The Top View and PDC images are displayed if
the system is switched on via iDrive.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Top View is displayed.
Switching on the backup camera via
the iDrive
With Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
Seite 141
Driving comfort Controls
141
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
The backup camera image is displayed. The
setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display.
When the distance to an object is small, a red
bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in
the PDC display.
The display appears as soon as Top View is
activated.
If the rearview camera image was selected last,
it again appears on the display when reverse
gear is selected. To switch to Top View:
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on
the Control Display.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Brightness
With Top View switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With Top View switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Displaying the turning circle and
pathway lines
▷ The static, red turning circle line shows the
space needed to the side of the vehicle
when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists
you in assessing the amount of space ac‐
tually needed to the side of the vehicle.
The pathway line is dependent on the cur‐
rent steering angle and is continuously ad‐
justed with the steering wheel movement.
"Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits
Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the trunk lid open.
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
▷ In poor light.
A Check Control message is displayed in some
of these situations.
Side View
The concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road
users concealed by obstacles to the left and
right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐
tively late from the driver's seat. To improve
visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐
cle record the traffic situation on each side.
Notes
The images from both cameras are shown si‐
multaneously on the Control Display.
Seite 142
Controls Driving comfort
142
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle on blind driveways and intersections with
your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could
result from road users or objects located out‐
side the picture area of the Side View cam‐
eras.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Side View
Cameras
Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐
ture the image.
The two camera lenses are located on the
sides of the bumper.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 218.
Switching on/off
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Display
The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
on the Control Display.
Guidelines at the bottom of the image show
the position of the front of the vehicle.
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1.
"Brightness"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
1.
"Contrast"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Seite 143
Driving comfort Controls
143
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
System limits
The cameras capture a maximum range of
330 ft/100 m.
Parking assistant
The concept
This system assists the driver in parking paral‐
lel to the road.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure.
When parking, also take note of the visual and
acoustic information issued by the PDC and
the parking assistant and react accordingly.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 136.
Hints
Personal responsibility
The parking assistant does not relieve
the driver of responsibility for the vehicle dur‐
ing the parking procedure.
Watch the parking space and parking proce‐
dure closely and intervene if necessary; other‐
wise, there is the danger of an accident.◀
Changes to the parking space
Changes to the parking space after it was
measured are not taken into account by the
system.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐
dent occurring.◀
Transporting loads
Loads that extend beyond the perimeter
of the vehicle are not taken into account by the
system during the parking procedure.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐
dent occurring.◀
Curbs
The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐
cle may become damaged.◀
An engine that has been switched off by the
Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐
cally when the parking assistant is activated.
Requirements
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Minimum length of the gap: own vehicle's
length plus approx. 4 ft/1.2 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking procedure
▷ Closed doors.
▷ Parking brake released.
Seite 144
Controls Driving comfort
144
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Parking assistant
Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasound sensors used to measure park‐
ing spaces are located in the side turn signals.
To ensure full operability:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Switching on/off
Switching on with the button
Press the button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Activate:
"Parking Assistant" Select the
symbol in the Control Display.
Switching off
The system can be deactivated as follows:
▷ Press the button.
▷ Switch off the ignition.
Display on the Control Display
Activating/deactivating the system
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but
not activated.
The system is activated.
Without Professional navigation
system or TV: system status
The status is displayed with symbols.
Gray: parking space search.
Blue: the system is activated. A
suitable parking space was
found.
Seite 145
Driving comfort Controls
145
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
The parking procedure is active.
Steering control has been
seized.
Status of the parking space search
▷ Gray, arrow 1: parking space search.
▷ Blue, arrow 2: parking space is suitable.
The vehicle is parked in the parking space
if the parking procedure is active.
▷ No display: no parking space search.
With navigation system professional
or TV: status of the system
▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side
of the vehicle representation. Parking as‐
sistant is activated and search for parking
space active.
▷ Suitable parking spaces are displayed next
to the vehicle symbol at the edge of the
road as on the Control Display. When the
parking assistant is active, suitable parking
spaces are highlighted.
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
been seized.
▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forwards
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant
Check the traffic situation as well
Loud sounds outside and within the vehi‐
cle can drown out the signal tones of the park‐
ing assistant and PDC.
Check the traffic situation around the vehicle
with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident.◀
1.
Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐
vate it if necessary.
The status of the parking space search is
indicated on the Control Display.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
To achieve the best possible parking posi‐
tion, wait for the automatic steering wheel
movement after the gear change when the
vehicle is stationary.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display.
3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec‐
essary.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
▷ Press the button.
Seite 146
Controls Driving comfort
146
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if
he takes over steering.
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match
the instruction on the Control Display.
▷ If a turn signal is activated in the opposite
direction to the desired side for parking.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces
if necessary.
▷ If doors are open.
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly
arise.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Continuing
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued if necessary.
Follow the instructions on the Control Display
to do this.
System limits
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
tance in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When sensors are dirty or iced over.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ When leaves or snow has collected in the
parking space.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physi‐
cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in
the following circumstances:
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure,
such as fences.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may
not be detected.
The parking assistant may identify parking
spaces that are not suitable for parking.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked.
Seite 147
Driving comfort Controls
147
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Head-up Display
The concept
This system projects important information
into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.
In this way, the driver can get information with‐
out averting his or her eyes from the road.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐
tings.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
Display
Overview
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation system.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Collision warning.
▷ Speed limit detection.
▷ Cruise control.
▷ Distance information.
▷ Congestion Assistant.
▷ Pedestrian warning.
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient light.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be ad‐
ditionally influenced using the instrument light‐
ing.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Seite 148
Controls Driving comfort
148
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Adjusting the height
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the rotation
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Rotation"
4. Turn the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ages from being displayed.
Therefore, have the special windshield re‐
placed by a service center only.
Distance information
The concept
The system displays a symbol in the Head-up
Display to indicate that the distance behind the
vehicle in front is not sufficient.
General information
The distance is determined by the radar sen‐
sor of the Active Cruise Control.
Hints
Personal responsibility
The display does not relieve the driver of
the responsibility to adapt his or her distance
and driving style to the traffic conditions. Main‐
tain the prescribed safety distance.◀
At a glance
Radar sensor
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the
vehicle.
A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de‐
tection of vehicles.
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐
move layers of snow and ice carefully.
▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar
sensor.
Switching on
1.
Switching on Head-Up Display, refer to
page 148.
2. "Distance info": Select the indication in the
Head-Up Display, refer to page 148.
Display in the Head-up Display
The symbol is displayed when the dis‐
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead
is too short.
Functional requirements
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.
Seite 149
Driving comfort Controls
149
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected.
▷ Distance too short for longer than about
2 seconds.
▷ Speed greater than approx.
40 mph/70 km/h.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar
sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be
caused by damage incurred during parking, for
example.
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.
Seite 150
Controls Driving comfort
150
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Climate control
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Automatic climate control
1 Air distribution, left
2 Temperature, left
3 AUTO program, left
4 Air flow, AUTO intensity, left, residual heat
5 Remove ice and condensation
6 Maximum cooling
7 Display
8 Air volume, AUTO intensity, right
9 AUTO program, right
10 Temperature, right
11 Air distribution, right
12 Seat heating, right 47
13 Active seat ventilation, right 47
14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
15 Cooling function
16 Rear window defroster
17 SYNC program
18 Active seat ventilation, left 47
19 Seat heating, left 47
Seite 151
Climate control Controls
151
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Climate control functions in detail
Manual air distribution
Press the button repeatedly to select
a program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
▷ Footwell.
▷ Windows and footwell.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and footwell.
▷ Windows: driver's side only.
▷ Windows and upper body region.
If the windows are fogged over, press the
AUTO button on the driver's side to utilize the
condensation sensor.
Temperature
Turn the wheel to set the de‐
sired temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this
temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐
sary with the maximum cooling or heating ca‐
pacity, and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution, and tem‐
perature are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature, the
AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air
is directed to the windshield, side windows,
upper body, and into the footwell.
The cooling function, refer to page 153, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, auto‐
matic control of the air flow and air distribution
can be adjusted.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐
sity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Air flow, manual
To be able to manually adjust the air flow,
switch off the AUTO program first.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Press the button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐
gram is active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the cooling function or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
Seite 152
Controls Climate control
152
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air flow and air circulation
mode.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body
region. The vents need to be open for this.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷ At an external temperature of approx.
32 ℉/0 ℃.
▷ When the engine is running.
The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐
gram is active.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to select
an operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the
outside air and controls the shutoff auto‐
matically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
button on the driver's side to utilize the con‐
densation sensor. Make sure that air can flow
onto the windshield.
Continuous recirculated-air mode
The recirculated-air mode should not be
used for an extended period of time, as the air
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead‐
ily.◀
Cooling function
The passenger compartment can only be
cooled with the engine running.
Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified
and – depending on the temperature setting –
warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 170, devel‐
ops that exits underneath the vehicle.
Rear window defroster
Press the button.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
SYNC program
Press the button.
Current settings on the driver's side
for the temperature, air volume, air distribution,
and AUTO program are transferred to the front
passenger side.
The program is switched off if the settings on
the front passenger side are changed.
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is used to heat
the interior.
Functional requirement
▷ Up to 20 minutes after the engine has been
switched off.
▷ Warm engine.
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ External temperature below 77 ℉/25 ℃.
Seite 153
Climate control Controls
153
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Switching on
1. Switch off the ignition.
2.
Press the right side of the button
on the driver's side.
The symbol appears on the automatic cli‐
mate Control Display.
The interior temperature, air volume and air
distribution can be adjusted with the ignition
switched on.
Switching off
At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of
the button on the driver's side.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes.
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
▷ Complete system:
Press and hold the left button on
the driver's side until the control
clicks off.
▷ On the front passenger side:
Press and hold the left button on
the front passenger side.
Switching on
Press any button except:
▷ SYNC program.
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of Air volume button.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Seat ventilation.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.
This combined filter should be replaced during
scheduled maintenance, refer to page 202, of
your vehicle.
Ventilation
Front ventilation
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 1.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 2.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 3.
Adjusting the ventilation
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐
rection, e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot
from the sun.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Parked-car ventilation/
heating
The concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if nec‐
essary.
Seite 154
Controls Climate control
154
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
The parked-car heating warms the vehicle in‐
terior, making snow and ice easier to remove.
With the ignition switched off, the air is auto‐
matically routed to the windshield, to the side
windows, and into the footwell.
The systems can be switched on and off di‐
rectly or by using two preset departure times.
The switch-on time is automatically deter‐
mined based on the temperature. The systems
promptly switch on before the selected depar‐
ture time.
Operation takes place on the iDrive or the re‐
mote control.
Note
Parked-car heating in enclosed areas
Do not operate the parked-car heating in
enclosed areas, as breathing of the harmful ex‐
haust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness
and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon
monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly
toxic gas. Switch off the parked-car heating
when refueling.◀
At external temperatures below 32 ℉/0 ℃, wa‐
ter vapor occurs that emerges from below the
vehicle.
Functional requirements
Parked-car ventilation
▷ With remote control or when the departure
time is preselected: depends on internal,
external and set temperature.
▷ Direct operation via iDrive: any external
temperature.
▷ In direct mode via remote control: external
temperature above approx. 59 ℉/15 ℃.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Parked-car heating
▷ With remote control or when the departure
time is preselected: depends on internal,
external and set temperature.
▷ Direct operation via iDrive: any external
temperature.
▷ In direct mode via remote control: external
temperature below approx. 59 ℉/15 ℃.
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ The fuel tank is filled to above the reserve
range.
If the parked-car heating has not been used for
several months, it may be necessary to switch
the system on again after several minutes.
Switching on/off directly
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate ind. heating" or
"Activate comf. ventilation"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
The system continues to run for some time af‐
ter being switched off.
Preselecting the departure time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Dep. time 1:" or "Dep. time 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the departure time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate depart. time 1" or "Activate
depart. time 2"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the departure time is acti‐
vated.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reacti‐
vated.
Seite 155
Climate control Controls
155
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Remote control
At a glance
1 LED: transmission confirmation
2 Switching on/off
3 Activate parked-car ventilation/heating
4 Deactivate parked-car ventilation/heating
Remote control range
The reception-dependent average range is ap‐
prox. 490 ft/150 m.
The range is best when the remote control is
held upright and as high as possible.
Switching on/off directly
1. Press the button until the green
LED lights up.
2. Within approx. the next 5 seconds, press
the desired button until the green or red
LED lights up:
Switching on
Switching off
Correct transmission to the system is con‐
firmed for approx. 2 seconds by rapid flashing
of the green LED.
If there is a transmission error, the red LED
lights up for approx. 2 seconds.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes.
Frequencies
The remote control may not function properly
if it experiences local interference from other
systems or devices that use the same fre‐
quency.
Replacing the batteries
Replace the battery if a Check Control mes‐
sage is displayed or if the LED either no longer
lights up or flashes when the remote control is
activated.
No rechargeable batteries
Do not use rechargeable batteries, as
damage may result from the substances in the
batteries.◀
1.
Use a suitable object to unclip the battery
compartment, arrow 1.
2. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
ment; see arrow 2.
3. Insert batteries of the same type.
4. Press the cover closed.
Take the used battery to a recycling
center or to your service center.
New remote control
A new remote control can be put into operation
as a second device or if the original one was
lost; it can be initialized by your service center
if needed.
Two remote control devices can be used with
the vehicle.
Seite 156
Controls Climate control
156
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Integrated universal remote
control
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can
operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled
systems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The integrated universal remote con‐
trol replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans‐
mitters. To operate the remote control, the
buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be
programmed with the desired functions. The
hand-held transmitter for the particular system
is required in order to program the remote con‐
trol.
During programming
During programming and before activat‐
ing a device using the integrated universal re‐
mote control, ensure that there are no people,
animals, or objects in the range of movement
of the remote-controlled device; otherwise,
there is a risk of injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the instructions of the system
to be controlled, the system is gener‐
ally compatible with the integrated universal
remote control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ Your service center.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of John‐
son Controls, Inc.
Controls on the interior rearview
mirror
▷ LED, arrow 1.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the left and right button on
the interior rearview mirror simultaneously
for approximately 20 seconds until the LED
on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This
Seite 157
Interior equipment Controls
157
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
erases all programming of the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to
8 cm away from the buttons on the interior
rearview mirror. The required distance de‐
pends on the manual transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button
of the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter and the button to be program‐
med on the interior rearview mirror. The
LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐
gin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. When the LED is
flashing faster, this indicates that the but‐
ton on the interior rearview mirror has been
programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐
tween the interior rearview mirror and the
hand-held transmitter and repeat the step.
Several more attempts at different distan‐
ces may be necessary. Wait at least
15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button
and repeatedly press and release the
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds.
6.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐
rior rearview mirror buttons.
Special feature of the alternating-
code wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the
system to be controlled features an alternat‐
ing-code system.
Read the system's operating manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior rear‐
view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior
rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then
stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system
features an alternating-code system. Flashing
and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐
peat for approximately 20 seconds.
For systems with an alternating-code system,
the integrated universal remote control and the
system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the operating manual of the sys‐
tem being set up for information on how to
synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
ond person.
To synchronize:
1.
Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
rearview mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior rearview mirror for approximately
3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
repeat this work step up to three times in
order to finish synchronization. Once syn‐
chronization is complete, the programmed
function will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror
button to be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED
starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held
transmitter for the system to be controlled
approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The
required distance depends on the manual
transmitter.
Seite 158
Controls Interior equipment
158
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐
idly. When the LED is flashing faster, this
indicates that the button on the interior
rearview mirror has been programmed.
The system can then be controlled by the
button on the interior rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at
different distances may be necessary. Wait
at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button
and repeatedly press and release the
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds.
Controls
Before operation
Before operating a system using the
integrated universal remote control, ensure
that there are no people, animals, or objects
within the range of movement of the remote-
controlled system; otherwise, there is a risk of
injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror while the engine is running or when
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down
the button within receiving range of the system
until the function is activated. The interior rear‐
view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐
nal is being transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the left and right button on the
interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes
rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Automatic transmission: open
Press the button.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Lighter
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote
control with you when leaving the vehicle so
that children cannot use the lighter and burn
themselves.◀
Replace the cover after use
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀
Seite 159
Interior equipment Controls
159
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Connecting electrical
devices
Hints
Do not plug chargers into the socket
Do not connect battery chargers to the
factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this
may damage the battery.◀
Replace the cover after use
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀
Sockets
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on. The
total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
Automatic transmission: center
console
Press the button.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
In the front passenger footwell
Socket is located below the glove compart‐
ment.
To access the socket: fold open the cover.
Center armrest
Remove the cover.
Ski bag
Capacity
The ski bag makes it possible to transport two
pairs of skis up to a length of 6 ft/2.10 m.
Preparing and loading the ski bag
1.
Pull the release in the direction of the ar‐
row, and remove the insert from the front. If
Seite 160
Controls Interior equipment
160
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
necessary, when pulling the release, press
against the insert.
2. Lay out the ski bag.
3. Press button in the cargo area, open tail‐
board and attach to the rear wall via mag‐
netic holder.
4. Load the ski bag. If necessary, wrap the
sharp edges of the skis.
5. Tighten the retaining strap.
Securing the ski bag
Secure the ski bag by tightening the re‐
taining strap; otherwise, the contents could
present a source of danger to the passengers,
for example during braking or evasive maneu‐
vers.◀
Stowing the ski bag
Proceed in the reverse order of loading.
When replacing the insert, place both pins into
the rail at the bottom and press the insert back
in place until a 'click' is heard. Ensure that the
rear seat backrest upholstery is not damaged.
Seite 161
Interior equipment Controls
161
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Notes
No loose objects in the passenger com‐
partment
Do not stow any objects in the passenger
compartment without securing them; other‐
wise, they may present a danger to occupants
for instance during braking and avoidance ma‐
neuvers.◀
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐
board
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard.
The mat materials could damage the dash‐
board.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 162.
▷ Storage compartment in the center arm‐
rest, refer to page 163.
▷ Compartments in the doors.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front
seats.
▷ Net in the front passenger footwell.
Glove compartment
Note
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐
cur during accidents.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Closing
Fold up the cover.
USB interface for data transfer
The concept
Connection for importing and exporting data
on USB devices, e.g.:
▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 31.
▷ Music collection, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
Seite 162
Controls Storage compartments
162
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Without Professional navigation
system or TV: at a glance
The USB interface is located in the center arm‐
rest.
Without Professional navigation
system or TV: at a glance
The USB interface is located in the glove com‐
partment.
Notes
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Front center armrest
Opening
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Press the buttons next to the lock.
Locking the storage compartment
The storage compartment in the armrest can
be locked with an integrated key to separately
secure the trunk lid, refer to page 37, for exam‐
ple.
After the storage compartment is locked, the
remote control can be handed out without the
integrated key, refer to page 30, for instance at
a hotel.
This prevents access to the storage compart‐
ment and to the cargo area.
Seite 163
Storage compartments Controls
163
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Connection for an external audio
device
.
Description, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication.
Clothes hooks
Two folding clothes hooks are provided in the
rear of the vehicle. To unfold them, press on
the top edge of the clothes hooks.
Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐
er's vision.◀
No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the
hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger
to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐
neuvers.◀
Cupholders
Notes
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is
the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
Unsuitable containers
Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐
tainers into the cupholders. This may result in
damage.◀
Automatic transmission: center
console
To open: press on the cover.
Storage compartments in the
cargo area
Net
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
rear cargo area trim.
Lashing eyes
To secure the cargo, refer to page 172, there
are lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Storage compartment under the cargo
floor cover
Raise the cargo floor cover using the strap.
Seite 164
Controls Storage compartments
164
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Seite 165
Storage compartments Controls
165
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a
long vehicle life and good economy.
Engine and differential
Always obey the official speed limit.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full
traction potential until after an initial breaking-
in period.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake
discs and brake pads. Drive moderately during
this break-in period.
Following part replacement
The same breaking in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing the trunk lid
Drive with the trunk lid closed
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
wise, in the event of an accident or braking and
evasive maneuvers, passengers and other road
users may be injured, and the vehicle may be
damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐
ter the passenger compartment.◀
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the blower speed.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system
Hot exhaust system
High temperatures are generated in the
exhaust system.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves,
grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot
exhaust system during driving, while in idle po‐
Seite 168
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
168
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
sition mode, or when parked. Such contact
could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri‐
ous personal injury as well as property dam‐
age.
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise,
there is the danger of getting burned.◀
Climate control windshield
The marked area is not covered with heat re‐
flective coating.
Use this area for garage door openers, devices
for electronic toll collection, etc.
Climate control laminated tinted
safety glass
The vehicle glass provides full protection
against the harmful effects of UV radiation on
the skin.
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
hicle
It is advised that you do not use mobile com‐
munication devices, e.g., mobile phones, in‐
side the vehicle without connecting them di‐
rectly to the external antenna. Otherwise, the
vehicle electronics and mobile communication
devices can interfere with each other. In addi‐
tion, there is no assurance that the radiation
generated during transmission will be dis‐
charged from the vehicle interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
Driving through water
Drive though calm water only and only if it is
not deeper than. 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this
height, no faster than walking speed, up to
6 mph/10 km/h.
Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
tions
Do not exceed this water depth and walking
speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the
electrical systems and the transmission may
be damaged.◀
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
ard feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
sary.
The vehicle maintains steering responsive‐
ness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a
minimum of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
Seite 169
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
169
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Objects in the area around the pedals
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in
place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
tened again after they were removed for clean‐
ing, for example.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet coated with road salt or
there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pres‐
sure on the brake pedal every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other road users.
The heat generated in this process helps dry
the brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required.
Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, re‐
sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi‐
ciency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if necessary.
Avoid load on the brakes
Avoid placing excessive load on the
brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐
sure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear
and possibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking.
In addition, steering and brake assist is un‐
available with the engine stopped.◀
Brake disc corrosion
The corrosion on the brake discs and the con‐
tamination on the brake pads are furthered by:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
applications to clean the discs is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
fect that generally cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops that exits under‐
neath the vehicle.
Traces of water under the vehicle like this are
normal.
Seite 170
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
170
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Loading
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Hints
Overloading the vehicle
To avoid exceeding the approved carry‐
ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve‐
hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and
increases the rate at which damage develops
inside the tires. This could result in a sudden
loss of tire inflation pressure.◀
No fluids in the trunk
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐
aged.◀
Determining the load limit
1.
Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
vehicle and unstable driving situations
may result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or
YYY pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Seite 171
Loading Driving tips
171
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Stowing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo there are four lashing
eyes in the cargo area.
Securing cargo
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps or with a cargo net or draw
straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with
cargo straps.
Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining straps or
draw straps on the lashing eyes in the cargo
area.
Securing cargo
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above; otherwise, it can endanger
the car's occupants if sudden braking or
swerving becomes necessary.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be
thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐
den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐
pants.◀
Seite 172
Driving tips Loading
172
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
ing style and regular maintenance can have an
influence on fuel consumption and on the envi‐
ronmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
raises fuel consumption.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption values in
various ways, for instance fuel consumption
can be influenced by the size of the tires.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐
tion pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
Seite 173
Saving fuel Driving tips
173
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the
accelerator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle
automatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐
onds of switching off the engine.
Using this system can cause certain compo‐
nents of the vehicle to become worn prema‐
turely.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
road conditions, maintenance or environmental
factors.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
consume additional fuel, especially in city and
stop-and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they
are not actually needed.
Have maintenance carried
out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
Have the maintenance carried out by your
service center.
Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 202.
ECO PRO
The concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
gine control and comfort functions, e. g. the
climate control output, are adjusted.
In addition, context-sensitive instructions can
be displayed that assist in driving in a manner
that optimizes fuel consumption.
The extension of the range that is achieved as
a result can be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
At a glance
The system includes the following
EfficientDynamics functions and displays:
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 175.
▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to
page 176
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to
page 175.
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1.
Activate ECO PRO.
Seite 174
Driving tips Saving fuel
174
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
3. Configure the program.
Via the iDrive
1. "Settings"
2. "ECO PRO mode"
Or
1. "Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure ECO PRO"
Configure the program.
ECO PRO Tip
▷ "Tip at:":
Set ECO Pro speed at which an ECO PRO
Tip is to be displayed.
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":
A reminder is displayed if the set ECO PRO
speed is exceeded.
ECO PRO climate control
"ECO PRO climate control"
The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-effi‐
cient.
By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or
cooling of the passenger compartment, fuel
consumption can be economized.
The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior
mirror heating are also reduced.
The exterior mirror heating is made available
when outside temperatures are very cold.
ECO PRO potential
The percentage of potential savings that can
be achieved with the current configuration is
displayed.
Display in the instrument cluster
Display in the instrument display
When ECO PRO mode is activated, the display
switches to a special configuration.
Some of the displays may differ from the dis‐
play in the instrument cluster.
ECO PRO bonus range
An extension of the range can
be achieved by an adjusted driv‐
ing style.
This may be displayed as the
bonus range in the instrument
cluster.
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
The bonus range is automatically reset every
time the vehicle is refueled.
Driving style
In the tachometer, a mark in the bar display in‐
dicates the current efficiency of the driving
style.
Mark in the CHARGE area, arrow 1: display for
energy recovered by coasting or when braking.
Mark in the POWER area, arrow 2: display
when accelerating.
The efficiency of the driving style is shown by
the color of the bar:
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long
as the mark moves within the blue range.
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by
backing off the accelerator pedal.
Seite 175
Saving fuel Driving tips
175
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
The display switches to blue as soon as all
conditions for fuel-economy-optimized driving
are met.
ECO PRO Tip - driving instruction
The arrow indicates that the
driving style can be adjusted to
be more fuel efficient by backing
off the accelerator for instance.
Note
The driving style display and ECO PRO tips in
the instrument cluster appear when the ECO
PRO display is activated.
Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "ECO PRO Info"
In the instrument display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Driving mode view"
ECO PRO tip - Symbols
An additional symbol and a text instruction are
displayed.
Symbol Measure
For efficient driving style, back off
the accelerator or delay accelerating
to allow time to assess road condi‐
tions.
Reduce speed to the selected ECO
PRO speed.
Automatic transmission: switch
from M/S to D and avoid manual
shift interventions.
Indications on the Control Display
EfficientDynamics
Information on fuel consumption and technol‐
ogy can be displayed during driving.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"
Displaying fuel consumption history
The average fuel consumption can be dis‐
played within an adjustable time frame.
Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐
lected time frame.
Trip interruptions are represented below the
bar on the time axis.
"Consumption history"
Adjusting fuel consumption history
time frame
Select the symbol.
Resetting fuel consumption history
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Reset consumption history"
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
The current efficiency can be displayed.
"EfficientDynamics info"
The following systems are displayed:
▷ Automatic engine start-stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Climate control output.
▷ Coasting.
Display ECO PRO tips
"ECO PRO Tips"
The setting is stored for the profile currently in
use.
Seite 176
Driving tips Saving fuel
176
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Coasting
The concept
The system helps to conserve fuel.
To do this, under certain conditions the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
sion when transmission position D is engaged.
The vehicle continues traveling with the engine
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Transmis‐
sion position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coast‐
ing.
As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is
depressed, the engine is automatically coupled
to the transmission again.
Hints
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐
fer to page 174, driving mode.
The function is available in a certain speed
range.
A forward-looking driving style helps the driver
to use the function as often as possible and
supports the fuel-conserving effect of coast‐
ing.
Safety mode
The function is not available if one of the fol‐
lowing conditions is satisfied.
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low
or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐
sive current.
▷ Cruise control activated.
Functional requirements
In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in
a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐
prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if
the following conditions are satisfied:
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not
operated.
▷ The selector lever is in transmission posi‐
tion D.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
The mark in the bar display be‐
low the tachometer is backlit in
blue and is located at the zero
point. The tachometer approxi‐
mately indicates idle speed.
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at
the zero point during coasting.
Indications on the Control Display
The Coasting driving condition is displayed in
EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode
is active.
Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2:
driving condition Coasting.
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"
3. "EfficientDynamics info"
Deactivating the system manually
The function can be deactivated in the Config‐
ure ECO PRO, refer to page 174, menu, e.g., to
Seite 177
Saving fuel Driving tips
177
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
use the braking effect of the engine when trav‐
eling downhill.
The setting is stored for the profile currently in
use.
Seite 178
Driving tips Saving fuel
178
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Seite 179
Saving fuel Driving tips
179
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Refueling
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is
not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Fuel cap
Opening
1.
Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1.
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be
closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.
A message is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐
ample.
Seite 182
Mobility Refueling
182
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
1. Open the cover on the right side trim.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump
symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when
refueling
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise
fuel may escape, causing harm to the environ‐
ment and damaging the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels
Obey safety regulations posted at the
gas station.◀
Seite 183
Refueling Mobility
183
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Fuel
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Fuel recommendation
Gasoline
For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐
out metallic additives.
Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐
line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or
iron, or permanent damage to the catalytic
converter and other components.◀
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should satisfy the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Do not refuel with ethanol E85
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as
this would damage the engine and fuel supply
system.◀
Gasoline quality
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
Minimum fuel grade
Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐
mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐
formance.◀
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Fuel quality
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail‐
ers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
Seite 184
Mobility Fuel
184
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Wheels and tires
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
Checking the pressure
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When the
tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is
higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐
sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a
month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐
serve this precaution, you may be driving on
tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition
that may not only compromise your vehicle's
driving stability, but also lead to tire damage
and the risk of an accident.◀
After correcting the tire inflation pressure:
▷ Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
▷ Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 186, contains all pressure specifications
for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐
perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐
proved tire sizes and recommended tire
brands. This information can be obtained from
your service center.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 186, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
door pillar.
Maximum permissible speed
Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀
Seite 185
Wheels and tires Mobility
185
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
640i
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.2 / 32
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y
XL RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.6 / 38
Compact wheel:
T 135/90 R 17 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
640i xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
2.4/ 35
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y XL
RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.6 / 38
Compact wheel:
T 135/90 R 17 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Seite 186
Mobility Wheels and tires
186
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
650i
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.2 / 32
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y XL
RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.6 / 38
650i xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
2.4/ 35
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y XL
RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.6 / 38
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Seite 187
Wheels and tires Mobility
187
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
640i
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
2.4 / 35 2.8 / 41
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.2 / 32
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y
XL RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.6 / 38
Compact wheel:
T 135/90 R 17 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
2.6 / 38 2.9 /42
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
2.3 / 33
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y
XL RSC
2.7 / 39
-
-
2.9 /42
Compact wheel:
T 135/90 R 17 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
640i xDrive
Without high-speed tuning feature
Seite 188
Mobility Wheels and tires
188
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38
245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
2.6 / 38 2.8 / 41
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y
XL RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.6 / 38
Compact wheel:
T 135/90 R 17 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
2.6 / 38 3.0 / 44
245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL RSC
2.9 /42 3.1 / 45
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y
XL RSC
2.8 / 41
-
-
2.8 / 41
Compact wheel:
T 135/90 R 17 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
650i
Without high-speed tuning feature
Seite 189
Wheels and tires Mobility
189
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
2.4 / 35 2.8 / 41
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.2 / 32
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y XL
RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.6 / 38
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
2.6 / 38 2.9 /42
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
2.3 / 33
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
2.5 / 36
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y XL
RSC
2.7 / 39
-
-
2.9 /42
650i xDrive
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38
245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
2.6 / 38 2.8 / 41
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
Seite 190
Mobility Wheels and tires
190
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y XL
RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.6 / 38
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
2.6 / 38 3.0 / 44
245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
2.9 /42 3.1 / 45
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y XL
RSC
2.8 / 41
-
-
2.8 / 41
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 1013
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
1013: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Seite 191
Wheels and tires Mobility
191
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Tire age
DOT … 1013: the tire was manufactured in the
10th week 2013.
Recommendation
Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every
6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g,
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐
ing habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
A represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.
Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 195, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Seite 192
Mobility Wheels and tires
192
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Notes
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
fects:
▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over
curbs, road damage, or similar things.
In case of tire damage
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the
wheels and tires checked right away; other‐
wise, there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the nearest service center. If
necessary, have the vehicle towed.
Otherwise, tire damage can be life-threatening
for vehicle occupants and other traffic partici‐
pants.◀
Repair of tire damage
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Information on mounting tires
Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Seite 193
Wheels and tires Mobility
193
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Wheel and tire combination
Information on the correct wheel-tire combina‐
tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be
obtained from your service center.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
the function of a variety of systems such as
ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
Approved wheels and tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
mends that you use only wheels and tires that
have been approved for your particular vehicle
model.
For example, despite having the same official
size ratings, variations can lead to body con‐
tact and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐
uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐
mine if they are suited for use, and therefore
cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi‐
cle if they are mounted.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling.
New tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full
traction potential until after an initial breaking-
in period.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Retreaded tires
Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
limit service life and have a negative impact on
road safety.◀
Winter tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do
provide better winter traction than summer
tires, they do not provide the same level of per‐
formance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field
of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire
specialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for
the winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and ac‐
cidents can occur.◀
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
Seite 194
Mobility Wheels and tires
194
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
case of a flat tire. Your service center will be
glad to advise you.
Rotating wheels between axles
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
against switching wheels between the front
and rear axles.
This can impair the handling characteristics.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires
Label
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels are composed of special rims and
tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐
gree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the
event of a pressure loss.
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
page 99.
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
page 96.
Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
Your service center will be glad to advise you.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains
have been tested by the manufacturer of your
vehicle, classified as road-safe and recom‐
mended.
Consult your service center for more informa‐
tion.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 225/55 R 17.
▷ 245/45 R 18.
▷ 245/40 R 19.
Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always
sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐
ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Seite 195
Wheels and tires Mobility
195
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Snow chain detection
The concept
When using snow chains, settings should be
made via the iDrive for the snow chains being
applied.
The snow chain detection system supports
you by automatically showing the detected
state on the Control Display.
When snow chains are in use, the rear axle
steering of the Integral Active Steering is deac‐
tivated automatically.
At speeds above the maximum permitted
speed with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h,
the rear axle steering is activated again auto‐
matically.
Activating the status
1.
"Settings"
2. "Tire chains"
3. "Tire chains installed"
Automatic detection
If functioning properly:
▷ Snow chains are mounted. The setting is
not activated .
After you drive a short distance, a Check
Control message is shown and the state is
activated automatically.
Confirm the automatic activation.
▷ Snow chains are not mounted. The setting
is activated .
At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, a Check
Control message is displayed. Deactivate
the status manually.
If not functioning properly:
▷ Snow chains are mounted. The setting is
not activated .
A Check Control message is not displayed.
The automatic detection system is mal‐
functioning. Activate the status manually.
Activating/deactivating rear axle
steering
If the status indicating that snow chains are in
use is activated, the rear axle steering is deac‐
tivated automatically.
At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle
steering is activated again, even though snow
chains are in use.
Seite 196
Mobility Wheels and tires
196
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Vehicle identification number
2 Jump-starting, negative terminal
3 Washer fluid reservoir
4 Jump-starting, positive terminal
5 Oil filler neck.
6 Coolant reservoir, except 650i.
Hood
Opening the hood
Working in the engine compartment
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Seite 197
Engine compartment Mobility
197
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Never reach into the engine compart‐
ment
Never reach into the intermediate spaces or
gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise,
there is risk of injury, e.g., from rotating or hot
parts.◀
1. Pull the lever.
2. Press the release handle and open the
hood.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
Danger of injury when the hood is open
There is a danger of injury from protrud‐
ing parts when the hood is open.◀
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16
in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
Hood open when driving
If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over im‐
mediately and close it securely.◀
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Seite 198
Mobility Engine compartment
198
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Engine oil
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
the driving style and driving conditions. When
a sporty driving style is used, the engine oil
consumption, for example, is clearly higher.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
Checking the oil level
electronically
Status display
The concept
The oil level is monitored electronically during
driving and shown on the Control Display.
If the oil level reaches the minimum level, a
check control message is displayed.
Requirements
Depending on the previous displays, the status
display is displayed when the engine is running
or after the vehicle has been driven for at least
30 minutes.
Displaying the oil level
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Oil level display messages
Different messages appear on the display de‐
pending on the oil level. Pay attention to these
messages.
If oil level is too low, immediately add 1 US
quart/liter of oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immediately;
otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
Detailed measurement
The concept
In the detailed measurement the oil level is
checked and displayed via a scale.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
General information
A detailed measurement is only possible with
certain engines.
Requirements
▷ Automatic transmission: selector lever in
transmission position N or P and accelera‐
tor not depressed.
▷ Vehicle is on a level road and the engine is
running at operating temperature.
Performing a detailed measurement
In order to perform a detailed measurement of
the engine oil level:
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
Seite 199
Engine oil Mobility
199
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
3. "Measure engine oil level"
4. "Start measurement"
The oil level is checked and displayed via a
scale.
Duration: approx. 1 minute.
Adding engine oil
Filler neck
When the indicator lights up in the instrument
cluster, add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil within
the next 125 miles/200 km.
Protect children
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
dren and heed the warnings on the containers
to prevent health risks.◀
Oil types for refilling
Hints
No oil additives
Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
Viscosity grades for engine oils
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity
grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,
and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine
damage may occur.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Some types of oils in some cases are not avail‐
able in all countries.
Approved oil types
Gasoline engine
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30.
BMW Longlife-01.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
Additional information about the approved
types of oils can be requested from the service
center.
Alternative oil types
If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following
specification can be added:
Gasoline engine
API SM or superior grade specification.
Oil change
An oil change should be carried out by your
service center only.
Seite 200
Mobility Engine oil
200
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Coolant
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while
the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant
may cause burns.◀
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for your vehicle. Ask your service cen‐
ter for suitable additives.
Coolant level
Checking
1.
Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir
slightly counterclockwise to allow any ex‐
cess pressure to dissipate, and then open
it.
3. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks
in the filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
the cap must point towards one another.
6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 201
Coolant Mobility
201
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
BMW Maintenance System
The maintenance system directs you to re‐
quired maintenance measures and thereby
supports you in maintaining road safety and
the operational reliability of the vehicle.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐
mines the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance you need to your user
profile.
Details on the service requirements, refer to
page 79, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control.
Your service center will read out this data and
suggest the right array of service procedures
for your vehicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
mote control with which the vehicle was driven
most recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a service center update the
time-dependent maintenance procedures,
such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter.
Service booklet
Perform maintenance work at the service cen‐
ter, and record the work in the service booklet.
The entries are proof of regular maintenance.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els for additional information on service re‐
quirements.
Maintenance and repair should be performed
by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐
ular maintenance procedures recorded in the
vehicle's Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐
nance.
Seite 202
Mobility Maintenance
202
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Canadian model: warning light indi‐
cates the engine symbol.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Fuel cap
The indicator lamp lights up.
If the fuel cap is not properly tightened,
the OBD system may conclude that
fuel vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tight‐
ened, the display should go out in a short time.
Seite 203
Maintenance Mobility
203
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored under
the cargo floor cover in the cargo area.
Wiper blade replacement
General information
Do not fold down the wipers without
wiper blades
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades
have not been installed; this may damage the
windshield.◀
Replacing the wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer
to page 66, the wiper arms.
2. Fold up the wipers.
3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po‐
sition.
4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
Lamp and bulb replacement
Hints
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
Seite 204
Mobility Replacing components
204
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
the service center if you are unfamiliar with
them or they are not described here.
You can obtain a selection of replacement
bulbs at the service center.
Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
otherwise, there is the danger of getting
burned.◀
Working on the lighting system
When working on the lighting system,
you should always switch off the lights af‐
fected to prevent short circuits.
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center. Due to the high voltage
present in the system, there is the danger of
fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀
Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,
or hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover
serve as the light source for controls, display
elements and other equipment.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;
otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
Headlamp glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the light switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
lamp glasses do not need to be changed.
If the headlamps do not dim despite driving
with the light switched on, increasing humidity
forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the
service center check this.
Headlamp setting
The headlamp adjustments can be affected by
changing lamps and bulbs. Therefore after a
change, have the headlamp setting checked
and corrected by Service.
Xenon headlamps
Hints
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the
likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the
lamps on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps and
continue the trip with great care. Comply with
local regulations.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center. Due to the high voltage
present in the system, there is the danger of
fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
please contact your BMW center.
Seite 205
Replacing components Mobility
205
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 204.
With Xenon-headlamps, the following lamps
are designed with LED technology:
▷ Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps.
▷ Turn signals, incl. side indicators
▷ Daytime running lights
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Turning lamp on the Xenon headlamp
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 204.
The illustration shows the left side of the en‐
gine compartment.
55-watt bulb, H3
1.
Turn the cap and remove it.
2. Detach the wire bracket.
3. Disconnect the cable at the plug-in con‐
nection and remove the bulb.
4. Insert the new bulb. Ensure that the bulb
has the correct orientation. Because of its
shape, the bulb can only be inserted in one
direction.
5. Secure the bulb with the wire bracket.
6. Connect the bulb.
7. Mount the cap.
LED headlamps
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 204.
With LED headlamps, all front lamps and side
indicators are designed with LED technology.
If an LED fails, switch on the front fog lamps
and continue the trip with great care. Comply
with local regulations.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
At a glance
1 Turn signal/brake lamp
2 Reversing lamp
3 Inside brake lamp
4 Tail lamp
5 Outside brake lamp
6 Rear reflector
Turn signal, outer brake, tail, and
license plate lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 204.
Seite 206
Mobility Replacing components
206
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
These lights feature LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Lamps in the trunk lid
Access to the lamps
If necessary, remove the fasteners using the
screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit
and fold away the cover.
Inside brake lamp
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 204.
24-watt bulb, HP24W
1.
Squeeze the bulb holder and pull it out.
2. Pull off the connector.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Mount the bulb holder and the cover of the
trunk lid in reverse order.
Reversing lamp
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 204.
16-watt bulb, W16W
1. Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise.
2. Pull out the bulb and replace it.
3. Mount the bulb holder and the cover of the
trunk lid in reverse order.
Changing wheels
Hints
The vehicle equipment does not include a
spare tire.
When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire
does not need to be changed immediately in
the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
accessories from your service center.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the positions shown.
Seite 207
Replacing components Mobility
207
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐
trolyte will last for the life of the battery.
Your service center will be glad to advise you
on questions regarding the battery.
Battery replacement
Use approved vehicle batteries only
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
ble.◀
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your service cen‐
ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available and that any Check Control mes‐
sages of these comfort functions are no longer
displayed.
Charging the battery
Note
Do not plug chargers into the socket
Do not connect battery chargers to the
factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this
may damage the battery.◀
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐
riods, longer than a month.
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 212, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
▷ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:
store the positions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Radio station: saving new, see user's
manual for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication.
▷ Navigation system: wait for the operability
of the navigation.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by your
service center or bring them to a recy‐
cling center.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Notes
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐
tute of another color or amperage rating; this
could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐
sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box
in the cargo area.
Seite 208
Mobility Replacing components
208
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
In the glove compartment
Push the handle up, arrow 1, and open the lid,
arrow 2.
In the cargo area
Open the cover on the right side trim.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Seite 209
Replacing components Mobility
209
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
Intelligent Emergency
Request
Requirements
▷ The radio ready state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ A ConnectedDrive contract is available.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
Hints
Emergency Request not guaranteed
For technical reasons, the Emergency
Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐
able conditions.◀
Initiating an Emergency Request
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
was initiated.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes when a connection to the
BMW Response Center has been estab‐
lished.
When the emergency request is received
at the BMW Response Center, the BMW
Response Center contacts you and takes
further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this purpose, data that are used to de‐
termine the necessary rescue measures,
such as the current position of the vehicle
Seite 210
Mobility Breakdown assistance
210
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
if it can be established, are transmitted to
the BMW Response Center.
▷ If the LED is flashing, but the BMW Re‐
sponse Center can no longer be heard via
the speaker, you can nevertheless still be
heard for the BMW Response Center.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
the trunk lid.
To remove, loosen the bracket.
First aid kit
Note
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
Storage
The first aid kit is located in the insert in the
rear seat backrest.
1. Pull the release in the direction of the ar‐
row, and remove the insert from the front. If
necessary, when pulling the release, press
against the insert.
2. Remove the first aid kit.
When replacing the insert, place both pins into
the rail at the bottom and press the insert back
in place until a 'click' is heard. Ensure that the
rear seat backrest upholstery is not damaged.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐
sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance phone number can
be viewed on the iDrive or a connection to
Seite 211
Breakdown assistance Mobility
211
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Roadside Assistance can be established di‐
rectly.
Jump-starting
Notes
If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Do not touch live parts
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐
jury, always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running.◀
Preparation
1.
Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐
mation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Bodywork contact between vehicles
Make sure that there is no contact be‐
tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐
wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀
Starting aid terminals
Connecting order
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury
from sparking.◀
The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐
gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐
tive terminal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
1.
Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter‐
minal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
Seite 212
Mobility Breakdown assistance
212
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Tow-starting and towing
Automatic transmission: transporting
your vehicle
Note
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Therefore, contact a service center in the
event of a breakdown.
Do not have the vehicle towed
Have your vehicle transported on a load‐
ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐
cur.◀
Tow truck
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for
maneuvering the vehicle only.
Towing other vehicles
General information
Light towing vehicle
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will
not be possible to control the vehicle re‐
sponse.◀
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Seite 213
Breakdown assistance Mobility
213
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited during
cornering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attaching the tow rope correctly
Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is
secured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the BMW. It is contained in the
onboard vehicle tool kit under the cargo floor
cover.
Tow fitting, information on use
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the
vehicle can occur.◀
Screw thread
Push out the cover by pressing on the top
edge.
Tow-starting
Automatic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
cannot be started by tow-starting.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
edied.
Seite 214
Mobility Breakdown assistance
214
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Care
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Car washes
Hints
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away
and use a maximum temperature of
140 ℉/60 ℃.
If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a
distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐
tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐
sively high pressures or temperatures can
cause damage or preliminary damage that may
then lead to long-term damage.
Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure
washer.◀
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-
pressure washers
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g.,
Park Distance Control, for extended periods of
time and only from a distance of at least
12 in/30 cm.◀
Regularly remove foreign items such as leaves
in the area below the windshield when the
hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter.
Intense soiling and road salt can damage the
vehicle.
Automatic car washes
Hints
Note the following:
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width
of the vehicle.
▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
page 66, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
vation.
▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can
be triggered by the interior motion sensor
of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐
tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm,
refer to page 41.
Guide rails in car washes
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
could be damaged.◀
Before driving into a car wash
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
car wash, take the following steps:
Automatic transmission:
1.
Drive into the car wash.
2. Engage transmission position N.
3. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains switched
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐
played.
Seite 215
Care Mobility
215
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Do not turn off the ignition in the car
wash
Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash;
otherwise, the transmission position P is
engaged and damages can result.◀
To start the engine:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐
ping on the brake turns the ignition off.
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside
when in transmission position N. A signal is
sounded when an attempt is made to lock the
vehicle.
Transmission position
Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.
Headlamps
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
caustic cleansers.
▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due
to insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
▷ Thaw ice with deicing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake
discs can occur.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Car care products
BMW recommends using cleaning and care
products from BMW, since these have been
tested and approved.
Car care and cleaning products
Follow the instructions on the container.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
cles.
Cleansers can contain substances that are
dangerous and harmful to your health.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your car care to these
influences.
Aggressive substances, such as spilled fuel,
oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed
immediately to prevent the finish from being
altered or discolored.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, provide leather care roughly every
two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Seite 216
Mobility Care
216
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from the
service center.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use
a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita‐
ble interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously.
Damage from Velcro® fasteners
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or
other articles of clothing can damage the seat
covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are
closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disk.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Aside from water, treat only with rubber
cleansers.
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any
silicon-containing car care products in order to
avoid damage or reduced noise damping.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Plastic components
These include:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Headliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matte black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Lightly dampen the cloth with water.
Do not soak the headliner.
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
or solvents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or
solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead
to surface damage.◀
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Chemical cleaning
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the webbing.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety
belts until they are dry.
Seite 217
Care Mobility
217
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Carpets and floor mats
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in
place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
tened again after they were removed for clean‐
ing, for example.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the passen‐
ger compartment for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensors/cameras
To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass
cleaner.
Displays/screens
Clean the displays with an antistatic microfiber
cloth.
Cleaning displays
Do not use chemical or household
cleansers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the
unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
ces or electrical components.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
can result.◀
Long-term vehicle storage
Your service center can advise you on what to
consider when storing the vehicle for longer
than three months.
Seite 218
Mobility Care
218
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Seite 219
Care Mobility
219
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Technical data
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Dimensions
Width, height
1 Vehicle height: 53.9 inches/1,369 mm
2 Vehicle width without mirrors: 74.6 inches/
1,894 mm
3 Vehicle width with mirrors: 81.9 inches/
2,081 mm
Seite 222
Reference Technical data
222
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Length, wheel base
1 Wheelbase: 112.4 inches/2,855 mm 2 Length: 192.8 inches/4,896 mm
Smallest turning circle
Dia.: 38.4 ft/11.7 m
Weights
640i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,828/2,190
Load lbs/kg 772/350
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,425/1,100
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,668/1,210
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.2/460
Seite 223
Technical data Reference
223
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
640i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,020/2,277
Load lbs/kg 770/349
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,600/1,179
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,700/1,225
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.2/460
650i
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission
Sport automatic transmission
lbs/kg
lbs/kg
5,115/2,320
5,115/2,320
Load lbs/kg 770/349
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,600/1,179
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,710/1,229
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.2/460
650i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,245/2,379
Load lbs/kg 770/349
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,710/1,229
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,755/1,250
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.2/460
Capacities
Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 18.5/70 Fuel quality, refer
to page 184
Windshield and headlamp
washer system
US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5.0
Seite 224
Reference Technical data
224
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Seite 225
Technical data Reference
225
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 116
ACC, Active Cruise Control
with Stop & Go 124
Activated-charcoal filter 154
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 112
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go, ACC 124
Active Protection 113
Active roll stabilization, see
Dynamic Drive 119
Active seat, front 47
Active seat ventilation,
front 47
Active Steering, integral 119
Adaptive brake assistant 116
Adaptive brake lights, refer to
Brake force display 113
Adaptive drive 119
Adaptive light control 87
Additives, oil 200
Adjusting, steering wheel 53
Adjustments, seats/head re‐
straints 45
After washing vehicle 216
Airbags 91
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 92
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
culated-air mode 153
Air distribution, manual 152
Air drying, refer to Cooling
function 153
Air flow, automatic climate
control 152
Air pressure, tires 185
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐
tion 154
Alarm system 40
Alarm, unintentional 41
All around the center con‐
sole 14
All around the interior rear‐
view mirror 15
All around the steering
wheel 12
All-season tires, refer to Win‐
ter tires 194
All-wheel-drive 118
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 158
Alternative oil types 200
Ambient light 89
Antifreeze, washer fluid 67
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 116
Anti-slip control, refer to
DSC 116
Approved engine oils 200
Armrest, refer to Front center
armrest 163
Arrival time 83
Ashtray 159
Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
tance 211
Assistance when driving
off 116
Attentiveness assistant 114
AUTO H button, refer to Au‐
tomatic Hold 63
AUTO intensity 152
Automatic car wash 215
Automatic Cruise Control
with Stop & Go 124
Automatic Curb Monitor 52
Automatic deactivation, front
passenger airbags 93
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 87
Automatic Hold 63
Automatic locking 39
Automatic recirculated-air
control 153
Automatic Soft Closing,
doors 36
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 67
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 152
AUTO program, intensity 152
Auto Start/Stop function 60
Average fuel consumption 83
Average speed 83
Axle loads, weights 223
B
Backrest curvature, refer to
Lumbar support 46
Backrest, seats 45
Backrest, width 46
Backup camera 138
Band-aids, refer to First aid
kit 211
Bar for tow-starting/
towing 213
Battery replacement, remote
control for parked-car heat‐
ing/ventilation 156
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 208
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 30
Battery, vehicle 208
Belts, safety belts 48
Beverage holder, cu‐
pholder 164
Blinds, sun protection 42
BMW Assist, see user's
manual for Navigation, En‐
Seite 226
Reference Everything from A to Z
226
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 202
Bonus range, ECO PRO 175
Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 164
Brake assistant 116
Brake assistant, adaptive 116
Brake discs, breaking in 168
Brake force display 113
Brake lamps, brake force dis‐
play 113
Brake lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 206
Brake lights, adaptive 113
Brake pads, breaking in 168
Braking, hints 169
Breakdown assis‐
tance 210, 211
Breaking in 168
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 85
Bulb replacement, front 204
Bulb replacement, rear 206
Button, RES 127
Button, Start/Stop 58
Bypassing, refer to Jump-
starting 212
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 7
Calling up mirror adjust‐
ment 39
Calling up seat adjust‐
ment 39
Calling up steering wheel ad‐
justment 39
Camera, backup camera 138
Camera, care 218
Camera, Side View 143
Camera, Top View 141
Can holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 164
Car battery 208
Car care products 216
Care, displays 218
Care, vehicle 216
Cargo 171
Cargo area lid 36
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 164
Cargo, securing 172
Cargo straps, securing
cargo 172
Car key, refer to Remote con‐
trol 30
Carpet, care 218
Car wash 215
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 168
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 202
CD/Multimedia, see user's
manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
Center console 14
Center-Lock, see button for
central locking 33
Central locking system 33
Central screen, refer to Con‐
trol Display 16
Changes, technical, refer to
Safety 7
Changing parts 204
Changing wheels 207
Changing wheels/tires 193
Check Control 75
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 199
Children, seating position 54
Children, transporting
safely 54
Child restraint fixing sys‐
tem 54
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 55
Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 54
Child seat, mounting 54
Child seats 54
Chrome parts, care 217
Cigarette lighter 159
Cleaning, displays 218
Climate control 151
Climate control laminated
tinted safety glass 169
Climate control wind‐
shield 169
Clock 78
Closing/opening from in‐
side 36
Closing/opening via door
lock 35
Closing/opening with remote
control 34
Clothes hooks 164
Coasting 177
Coasting with engine decou‐
pled, coasting 177
Coasting with idling en‐
gine 177
Collision warning with braking
function 100
Collision warning with City
Braking function 103
Combination switch, refer to
Turn signals 64
Combination switch, refer to
Wiper system 65
COMFORT+ program, Driving
Dynamics Control 122
Comfort Access 37
COMFORT program, Driving
Dynamics Control 122
Computer 82
Condensation on win‐
dows 152
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 170
Condition Based Service
CBS 202
Configure driving mode 122
Seite 227
Everything from A to Z Reference
227
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Confirmation signal 39
Congestion Assistant 130
ConnectedDrive, see user's
manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
ConnectedDrive Services
Control Display 16
Control Display, settings 84
Controller 16
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 116
Convenient opening 34
Coolant 201
Coolant temperature 78
Cooling function 153
Cooling, maximum 153
Cooling system 201
Corrosion on brake discs 170
Cruise control 133
Cruise control, active with
Stop & Go 124
Cruising range 78
Cupholder 164
Current fuel consumption 79
D
Damage, tires 193
Damping Control, dy‐
namic 119
Data, technical 222
Date 78
Daytime running lights 87
Defrosting, refer to Windows,
defrosting 152
Departure time, parked-car
heating 155
Departure time, parked-car
ventilation 155
Destination distance 83
Digital clock 78
Dimensions 222
Dimmable exterior mirrors 52
Dimmable interior rearview
mirror 52
Direction indicator, refer to
Turn signals 64
Display in windshield 148
Display lighting, refer to In‐
strument lighting 89
Displays 71, 72
Displays, cleaning 218
Disposal, coolant 201
Disposal, vehicle battery 208
Distance control, refer to
PDC 136
Distance information 149
Distance to destination 83
Divided screen view, split
screen 20
Door lock, refer to Remote
control 30
Doors, Automatic Soft Clos‐
ing 36
Downhill control 118
Drive-off assistant 116
Drive-off assistant, refer to
DSC 116
Driver assistance, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 99
Driving Assistant, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 99
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 120
Driving instructions, breaking
in 168
Driving mode 120
Driving notes, general 168
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 116
Driving tips 168
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 116
DTC driving dynamics 117
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 117
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 119
Dynamic Drive 119
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 116
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 117
E
ECO PRO 174
ECO PRO, bonus range 175
ECO PRO display 174
ECO PRO displays 74
ECO PRO driving mode 174
ECO PRO mode 174
ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐
struction 176
EfficientDynamics 176
Electronic displays, instru‐
ment cluster 72
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to DSC 116
Emergency detection, remote
control 31
Emergency release, door
lock 36
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 182
Emergency Request 210
Emergency service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 211
Emergency start function, en‐
gine start 31
Emergency unlocking, trunk
lid 37
Energy Control 79
Energy recovery 79
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 60
Engine, automatic switch-
off 60
Engine compartment 197
Engine compartment, work‐
ing in 197
Engine coolant 201
Engine idling when driving,
coasting 177
Engine oil 199
Engine oil, adding 200
Engine oil additives 200
Seite 228
Reference Everything from A to Z
228
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Engine oil change 200
Engine oil filler neck 200
Engine oil temperature 77
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 200
Engine oil types, ap‐
proved 200
Engine start during malfunc‐
tion 31
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 212
Engine start, refer to Starting
the engine 59
Engine stop 59
Engine temperature 77
Entering/exiting vehicle, as‐
sistance, steering wheel 53
Entering a car wash 215
Equipment, interior 157
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, refer to DSC 116
Exchanging wheels/tires 193
Exhaust system 168
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 52
Exterior mirrors 51
External start 212
External temperature dis‐
play 78
External temperature warn‐
ing 78
Eyes for securing cargo 172
F
Failure message, refer to
Check Control 75
False alarm, refer to Uninten‐
tional alarm 41
Fan, refer to Air flow 152
Fault displays, refer to Check
Control 75
Filler neck for engine oil 200
Fine wood, care 217
First aid kit 211
Fitting for towing, refer to
Tow fitting 214
Flat tire, changing
wheels 207
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 97
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 94
Flat tire, warning lamp 95, 98
Flooding 169
Floor carpet, care 218
Floor mats, care 218
Fold-out position, windshield
wipers 66
Foot brake 169
For the headliner, refer to All
around the interior rearview
mirror 15
Front airbags 91
Front center armrest 163
Front fog lamps 89
Front lamps 204
Front passenger airbags, au‐
tomatic deactivation 93
Front passenger airbags, indi‐
cator lamp 93
Front seats 45
Front turn signals, refer to
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 206
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 97
Fuel 184
Fuel cap 182
Fuel consumption, current 79
Fuel consumption, refer to
Average fuel consump‐
tion 83
Fuel filler flap 182
Fuel gauge 77
Fuel quality 184
Fuel recommendation 184
Fuel, tank capacity 224
Fuse 208
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 157
Gasoline 184
Gasoline quality 184
Gear change, automatic
transmission 68
Gear shift indicator 80
General driving notes 168
Glass sunroof, powered with
tilt function 42
Glove compartment 162
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 223
Gross weight, permissible for
trailer towing 223
H
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 62
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 158
Hazard warning flashers 210
HDC Hill Descent Con‐
trol 118
Head airbags 91
Headlamp control, auto‐
matic 87
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture 86
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture via remote control 34
Headlamp flasher 65
Headlamp glass 205
Headlamps 204
Headlamps, care 216
Headlamp washer system 65
Head restraints 45
Head restraints, front 49
Head-Up Display 148
Head-up Display, care 218
Heating, refer to Parked-car
heating 154
Seite 229
Everything from A to Z Reference
229
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Heavy cargo, stowing 172
Height, seats 45
Height, vehicle 222
High-beam Assistant 88
High beams 65
High beams/low beams, refer
to High-beam Assistant 88
Hill Descent Control
HDC 118
Hills 170
Hill start assistant, refer to
Drive-off assistant 116
Hints 6
Holder for beverages 164
Homepage 6
Hood 197
Horn 12
Hotel function, trunk lid 37
Hot exhaust system 168
HUD Head-Up Display 148
Hydroplaning 169
I
Ice warning, refer to External
temperature warning 78
Icy roads, refer to External
temperature warning 78
Identification marks, tires 191
Identification number, refer to
Important features in the en‐
gine compartment 197
iDrive 16
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control 30
Ignition off 58
Ignition on 58
Indication of a flat tire 95, 98
Indicator and warning
lamps 75
Individual air distribution 152
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 31
Inflation pressure, tires 185
Inflation pressure warning
FTM, tires 97
Info display, refer to Com‐
puter 82
Initialization, Integral Active
Steering 120
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 95
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 98
Instrument cluster 71
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 72
Instrument display, multifunc‐
tional 72
Instrument lighting 89
Integral Active Steering 119
Integrated key 30
Integrated universal remote
control 157
Intelligent Emergency Re‐
quest 210
Intelligent Safety 99
Intensity, AUTO pro‐
gram 152
Interior equipment 157
Interior lamps 89
Interior lamps via remote con‐
trol 34
Interior motion sensor 41
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐
matic dimming feature 52
Internet page 6
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 79
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 207
Joystick, automatic transmis‐
sion 68
Jump-starting 212
K
Key/remote control 30
Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
Access 37
Key Memory, refer to Per‐
sonal Profile 31
Kickdown, automatic trans‐
mission 68
Knee airbag 91
L
Lamp replacement, front 204
Lamp replacement, rear 206
Lamps 86
Lamps and bulbs 204
Lane departure warning 110
Lane margin, warning 110
Language on Control Dis‐
play 85
Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 172
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 55
Leather, care 216
LED headlamps, Bulb re‐
placement 206
LED light 206
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 205
Length, vehicle 223
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 21
License plate lamp, bulb re‐
placement 206
Light alloy wheels, care 217
Light control 87
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 205
Lighting 86
Lighting, speaker 90
Lighting via remote con‐
trol 34
Light switch 86
Load 171
Loading 171
Lock, door 35
Seite 230
Reference Everything from A to Z
230
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Locking/unlocking from in‐
side 36
Locking/unlocking via door
lock 35
Locking/unlocking with re‐
mote control 34
Locking, automatic 39
Locking, central 33
Locking, settings 39
Locking via trunk lid 37
Low beams 86
Low beams, automatic, refer
to High-beam Assistant 88
Lower back support 46
Lumbar support 46
M
Maintenance 202
Maintenance require‐
ments 202
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 79
Maintenance system,
BMW 202
Malfunction displays, refer to
Check Control 75
Manual air distribution 152
Manual air flow 152
Manual brake, refer to Parking
brake 62
Manual mode, transmis‐
sion 69
Manual operation, backup
camera 139
Manual operation, door
lock 36
Manual operation, exterior
mirrors 52
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 182
Manual operation, Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 136
Manual operation, Side
View 143
Manual operation, Top
View 141
Marking on approved
tires 194
Marking, run-flat tires 195
Massage seat, front 47
Master key, refer to Remote
control 30
Maximum cooling 153
Maximum speed, display 80
Maximum speed, winter
tires 194
Measure, units of 85
Medical kit 211
Memory for seat, mirrors,
steering wheel 50
Menu, EfficientDynamics 176
Menu in instrument clus‐
ter 82
Menus, operating, iDrive 16
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐
ing concept 17
Messages, refer to Check
Control 75
Microfilter 154
Minimum tread, tires 193
Mirror 51
Mirror memory 50
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 169
Modifications, technical, refer
to Safety 7
Moisture in headlamp 205
Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐
play 16
Mounting of child restraint fix‐
ing systems 54
Multifunctional instrument
display 72
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 12
N
Navigation, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Neck restraints, front, refer to
Head restraints 49
Neutral cleaner, see wheel
cleaner 217
New wheels and tires 193
Night Vision with pedestrian
detection 107
No Passing Information 80
Nylon rope for tow-starting/
towing 214
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 203
OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐
agnosis 203
Obstacle marking, rearview
camera 140
Octane rating, refer to Gaso‐
line quality 184
Odometer 78
Office, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Oil 199
Oil, adding 200
Oil additives 200
Oil change 200
Oil change interval, service
requirements 79
Oil filler neck 200
Oil types, alternative 200
Oil types, approved 200
Old batteries, disposal 208
Onboard monitor, refer to
Control Display 16
Onboard vehicle tool kit 204
Opening and closing 30
Opening and closing, from in‐
side 36
Seite 231
Everything from A to Z Reference
231
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Opening and closing via door
lock 35
Opening and closing, with re‐
mote control 34
Operating concept, iDrive 16
Optional equipment, standard
equipment 6
Outside air, refer to Auto‐
matic recirculated-air con‐
trol 153
Overheating of engine, refer
to Coolant temperature 78
Overtaking prohibitions 80
P
Paint, vehicle 216
Parallel parking assistant 144
Park Distance Control
PDC 136
Parked-car heating 155
Parked-car ventilation 155
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 170
Parking aid, refer to PDC 136
Parking assistant 144
Parking brake 62
Parking lamps 86
Parking lamps and roadside
parking lamps, refer to
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 206
Parking with Auto Hold 63
Passenger side mirror, tilting
downward 52
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
era 139
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 136
Pedestrian detection, refer to
Night Vision 107
Pedestrian warning with city
braking function 105
People detection, refer to
Night Vision 107
Permissible axle load 223
Personal Profile 31
Pinch protection system,
glass sunroof 43
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 42
Plastic, care 217
Power failure 208
Power sunroof, glass 42
Power windows 41
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 185
Pressure warning FTM,
tires 97
Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐
file 31
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 20
Protective function, glass
sunroof 43
Protective function, win‐
dows 42
Push-and-turn switch, refer to
Controller 16
Q
Queuing Assistant, see Con‐
gestion Assistant 130
R
Radiator fluid 201
Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control 30
Radio ready state 59
Radio, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Rain sensor 66
Rear axle steering 119
Rear lamps 206
Rearview mirror 51
Rear window defroster 153
Recirculated-air mode 153
Recommended tire
brands 194
Refueling 182
Remaining range 78
Remote control/key 30
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 35
Remote control, parked-car
heating/ventilation 156
Remote control, univer‐
sal 157
Replacement fuse 208
Replacing bulbs, see Lamp
replacement 204
Replacing parts 204
Replacing wheels/tires 193
Reporting safety defects 9
RES button 127
Reserve warning, refer to
Range 78
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 95
Residual heat, automatic cli‐
mate control 153
Retaining straps, securing
cargo 172
Retreaded tires 194
Reversing lamp, bulb replace‐
ment 207
Roadside parking lamps 87
Roller sunblinds 42
Roll stabilization, refer to
Adaptive Drive 119
Roll stabilization, see Dy‐
namic Drive 119
RON gasoline quality 184
Rope for tow-starting/
towing 214
RSC Run Flat System Com‐
ponent, refer to Run-flat
tires 195
Rubber components,
care 217
Run-flat tires 195
S
Safe braking 169
Seite 232
Reference Everything from A to Z
232
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Safety 7
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passen‐
ger seat 48
Safety belts 48
Safety belts, care 217
Safety Package, refer to Ac‐
tive Protection 113
Safety systems, airbags 91
Saving fuel 173
Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
play 16
Screwdriver 204
Screw thread for tow fit‐
ting 214
Seat belts, refer to Safety
belts 48
Seat heating, front 47
Seating position for chil‐
dren 54
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory 50
Seats 45
Seat ventilation, front 47
Selection list in instrument
cluster 82
Selector lever, automatic
transmission 68
Sensors, care 218
Service and warranty 7
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service
CBS 202
Service requirements, dis‐
play 79
Service, Roadside Assis‐
tance 211
Services, ConnectedDrive
Settings, locking/unlock‐
ing 39
Settings on Control Dis‐
play 84
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
rors, steering wheel 50
Shifting, automatic transmis‐
sion 67
Shift Lights 70
Shift paddles on steering
wheel 69
Shoulder support 47
Side airbags 91
Side View 142
Signaling, horn 12
Signals when unlocking 39
Sitting safely 45
Size 222
Ski bag 160
Smallest turning circle 223
Smoker's package 159
Snow chains 195
Socket 160
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 203
SOS button 210
Spare fuse 208
Speaker lighting 90
Specified engine oil
types 200
Speed, average 83
Speed limit detection, on‐
board computer 83
Speed limiter, display 80
Speed Limit Information 80
Speed limit in the com‐
puter 83
Split screen 20
SPORT+ - program, Dynamic
Driving Control 121
Sport automatic transmis‐
sion 69
SPORT program, driving dy‐
namics 122
Sport program, transmis‐
sion 69
Stability control systems 116
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 60
Start/Stop button 58
Start function during malfunc‐
tion 31
Starting the engine 59
Status display, tires 94
Status information, iDrive 19
Status of Owner's Manual 6
Steering, Integral Active
Steering 119
Steering wheel, adjusting 53
Steering wheel heating 53
Steering wheel memory 50
Steptronic, automatic trans‐
mission 67
Stopping the engine 59
Storage compartments 162
Storage compartments, loca‐
tions 162
Storage, tires 195
Storing the vehicle 218
Summer tires, tread 193
Supplementary text mes‐
sage 76
Surround View 138
Suspension settings 120
Switch for Dynamic Driving
Control 120
Switch, refer to Cockpit 12
Symbols 6
SYNC program, automatic cli‐
mate control 153
T
Tachometer 77
Tail and brake lamps 206
Tailgate 36
Tailgate via remote con‐
trol 34
Tail lamps 206
Tail lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 206
Technical changes, refer to
Safety 7
Technical data 222
Telephone, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 152
Seite 233
Everything from A to Z Reference
233
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Temperature display, external
temperature 78
Temperature, engine oil 77
Tempomat, refer to Active
Cruise Control 124
Terminal, starting aid 212
Text message, supplemen‐
tary 76
Theft alarm system, refer to
Alarm system 40
Theft protection, refer to
Central locking system 33
Thermal camera, refer to
Night Vision 107
Thigh support 46
Tilt alarm sensor 41
Tilt glass roof 42
Tilt, seats 45
Time of arrival 83
Tire damage 193
Tire identification marks 191
Tire inflation pressure 185
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, refer to FTM 97
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 94
Tires, changing 193
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 185
Tires, run-flat tires 195
Tire tread 193
Tone, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Tools 204
Top View 140
Total vehicle weight 223
Tow fitting 214
Towing 213
Tow-starting 213
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 94
Traction control 117
TRACTION program, Dy‐
namic Driving Control 121
Transmission, automatic 67
Transporting children
safely 54
Tread, tires 193
Trip computer 84
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 64
Trip odometer 78
Trunk lid 36
Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐
ing 37
Trunk lid, hotel function 37
Trunk lid via remote con‐
trol 34
Turning circle 223
Turning circle lines, rearview
camera 139
Turn signals, operation 64
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐
placement 206
U
Unintentional alarm 41
Units of measure 85
Universal remote control 157
Unlock button, automatic
transmission 68
Unlocking/locking from in‐
side 36
Unlocking/locking via door
lock 35
Unlocking/locking with re‐
mote control 34
Unlocking, settings 39
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 7
Upholstery care 217
USB interface 162
V
Variable steering, Integral Ac‐
tive Steering 119
Vehicle battery 208
Vehicle battery, replac‐
ing 208
Vehicle, breaking in 168
Vehicle care 216
Vehicle equipment 6
Vehicle identification number,
refer to Identification num‐
ber in the engine compart‐
ment 197
Vehicle jack 207
Vehicle paint 216
Vehicle storage 218
Vehicle wash 215
Ventilation 154
Vertical Dynamic Control, re‐
fer to Dynamic Damping
Control 119
Voice activation system 22
W
Warning indicators 75
Warning lamps 75
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 75
Warning triangle 211
Washer fluid 67
Washer fluid reservoir, ca‐
pacity 224
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 66
Washer system 65
Washing, vehicle 215
Water on roads 169
Weights 223
Welcome lamps 86
Wheel base, vehicle 223
Wheel cleaner 217
Wheels, changing 193
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 185
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 97
Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 94
Width, vehicle 222
Window defroster, rear 153
Windows, powered 41
Seite 234
Reference Everything from A to Z
234
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
Windshield, climate con‐
trol 169
Windshield washer fluid 67
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 66
Windshield washer sys‐
tem 65
Windshield wiper 65
Windshield wipers, fold-out
position 66
Winter storage, care 218
Winter tires, suitable
tires 194
Winter tires, tread 193
Wiper blades, replacing 204
Wiper fluid 67
Wiper system 65
Wood, care 217
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 21
Wrench 204
X
xDrive 118
Xenon headlamps, bulb re‐
placement 205
Seite 235
Everything from A to Z Reference
235
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
The Ultimate Driving
Machine
0140 2 910 771 ue
*BL291077100V*
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 910 771 - VI/13
